JP2022111385A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine in which damage to a shaft body can be suppressed.

SOLUTION: At an end face in an axial direction of a wheel gear 533, a protruding portion 533e is provided in a protruded manner. Therefore, when fitting a snap ring 534 into a circumferential groove of a shaft body 542, it is possible to work by securely grabbing the protruding portion 533e and the snap ring 534 individually with tools such as pliers without requiring to securely grab the shaft body 542 with a tool. Accordingly, the snap ring 534 can be fitted into the circumferential groove of the shaft body without damaging the shaft body 542.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 13

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine, comprising a gear member having teeth formed on the outer circumference and an insertion hole formed in the center thereof, and a shaft body inserted through the insertion hole of the gear member, the insertion hole being formed of the gear member. A structure is known in which rotational torque can be transmitted between a gear member and a shaft by utilizing engagement between flat surfaces provided on the inner surface and the outer surface of the shaft.

JP 2012-115580 A

A circumferential groove is recessed in the tip of the shaft, and after the shaft is inserted into the insertion hole of the gear member, the retaining ring is fitted into the circumferential groove of the shaft, whereby the shaft is It is made not to slip out of the insertion hole. In this case, the operation of fitting the retaining ring into the circumferential groove involves locking the shaft body and the retaining ring with one arm and the other arm of a tool such as radio pliers, respectively, and bringing these one arm and the other arm close to each other. It is done by displacing in the direction. However, there is a problem that the shaft may be damaged by being caught by the arm of the tool during the fitting operation.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing damage to the shaft body.

In order to achieve this object, a game machine according to claim 1 is provided with a D-shaped cross-sectional portion formed in a D-shaped cross section by making a part of the outer surface of the cylindrical shaft-shaped body flat, and a D-shaped cross-sectional portion thereof. A part of the inner surface of the circular hole is made flat so that the shaft having a circumferential groove recessed along the circumferential direction in the outer surface of the part and the D-shaped cross section of the shaft can be inserted. a rotating body having an insertion hole formed in a D-shaped cross section, and rotating together with the shaft by engaging the flat surface of the insertion hole and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section, and the rotating body and a retaining ring fitted in the circumferential groove to prevent the shaft from slipping out of the insertion hole in the axial direction, and a drive means for applying rotational driving force to the shaft or the rotating body There is, and the said rotating body is provided with the projection part projected along the said shaft from the axial direction end surface.

A gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the protrusion is positioned between the opposing open ends of a snap ring fitted in the circumferential groove of the shaft.

A gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, further comprising engaging means for engaging a retaining ring with the circumferential groove of the shaft.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the D-shaped cross section of the shaft is inserted into the insertion hole of the rotating body, and the circumferential groove of the D-shaped end face of the shaft protruding from the axial end face of the rotating body By fitting the retaining ring in the hole, the shaft is prevented from slipping out in the axial direction from the insertion hole of the rotating body. In this case, the axial end face of the rotating body has a projection along the shaft. A tool such as pliers can be used to lock and work. That is, there is no need to lock the shaft with a tool. Therefore, the retaining ring can be fitted into the circumferential groove of the shaft without damaging the shaft. This is particularly effective when the shaft is made of brass, since it is easily damaged. Examples of damage to the shaft include damage to the surface of the shaft and bending of the axis of the shaft.

According to the game machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the game machine of claim 1, it is possible to prevent the retaining ring from falling out of the circumferential groove of the shaft. That is, there is a relative rotation position between the shaft and the retaining ring where the engagement between the two is easily released, and when the relative rotation position is reached, the shaft is pulled out of the insertion hole of the rotating body. When a load is applied to the shaft, the retaining ring may fall out of the circumferential groove of the shaft.

On the other hand, according to claim 2, since the protrusion is positioned between the opposing open ends of the retaining ring fitted in the circumferential groove of the shaft, the open end of the retaining ring is brought into contact with the protrusion. , the retaining ring can be restricted from rotating relative to the shaft. Therefore, by setting the position of the protrusion at an appropriate position, the relative rotational position between the shaft and the retaining ring is maintained at an appropriate position, and the retaining ring is prevented from falling out of the circumferential groove of the shaft. can.

According to the game machine of claim 3, in addition to the effects of the game machine of claim 2, it is possible to improve the durability of the shaft and the rotating body. That is, in a structure in which the rotational torque transmitted between the rotating body and the shaft is borne by the flat surface of the insertion hole of the rotating body and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section of the shaft, these flat surfaces have a large load, It causes deterioration of durability.

On the other hand, in the third aspect, since the engaging means for engaging the retaining ring with the circumferential groove of the shaft is provided, the retaining ring is rotated together with the shaft through the engagement by the engaging means. be able to. As a result, the rotational torque transmitted between the rotating body and the shaft is transferred not only to the flat surface of the insertion hole in the rotating body and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section of the shaft, but also to the protrusions and stops of the rotating body. It can also serve between the open ends of the ring. As a result, the rotational torque can be distributed, and the durability of the shaft and the rotating body can be improved accordingly.

Further, in order to increase the engagement area between the flat surfaces to improve durability, the shaft and the rotating body must be increased in size and weight. Since the retaining ring, which serves as a stop, also has a role of bearing the rotational torque, it is possible to reduce the size and weight.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine, illustrating a state in which a first arm and a second arm of an arm operation unit are arranged at a first position; FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the arm operation unit in a state where the first arm and the second arm are arranged at the first position; FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the arm operation unit in a state where the first arm and the second arm are arranged at the first position; FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the arm operation unit with the first arm and the second arm arranged at the second position; FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the arm operation unit with the first arm and the second arm arranged at the second position; (a) is a front perspective view of a first arm, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the first arm. (a) is a partially enlarged front perspective view in which the distal end side of the first arm is in an exploded state, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear perspective view in which the distal end side of the first arm is in an exploded state. be. Fig. 10 is a partially enlarged rear view of the container of the first arm; FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the connecting portion between the wheel gear of the rotating mechanism and the shaft of the first rotary decoration. (a) is a top view of the shaft, (b) is a front view of the shaft viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14 (a), and (c) is an arrow XIVc in FIG. FIG. 14(d) is a top view of the wheel gear, (e) is a cross-sectional view of the wheel gear taken along line XIVe-XIVe in FIG. ) is a front view of the wheel gear as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVf in FIG. 14(d), and (g) is a top view of the retaining ring. (a) to (c) are partially enlarged top views of the wheel gear. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged top views of the rotation mechanism. (a) is a front perspective view of a second arm, and (b) is a back perspective view of the second arm. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of the gear member, the reduction gear, and the drive motor attached to the first base body; FIG. 10 is a front view of the gear member in a state where the first arm is connected; (a) is a front view of a gear member, (b) is a side view of the gear member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. It is a sectional view of a gear member in line XXc. (a) is a front view of the first base body, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first base body taken along line XXIb-XXIb of FIG. 21(a). (a) is a front view of the first arm and the second arm and the gear member arranged at the first position, and (b) is a portion of the first arm and the gear member in section XXIIb of FIG. 22(a). It is an enlarged front view. 22(a) is a front view of the first arm, the second arm, and the gear member in a state in which the gear member is reversely rotated from the state shown in FIG. 22(a), and FIG. It is a partially enlarged front view of the first arm and the gear member in the XXIIIb section. (a) is a front view of the first arm and the second arm and the gear member arranged at the second position, and (b) is a portion of the first arm and the gear member in section XXIVb of FIG. 24 (a). It is an enlarged front view. 24(a) is a front view of the first arm, the second arm, and the gear member in a state in which the gear member is forwardly rotated from the state shown in FIG. 24(a), and FIG. It is a partially enlarged front view of the first arm and the gear member in the XXVb section. (a) is a front view of a second base body, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second base taken along line XXVIb-XXVIb of FIG. 26(a). It is an exploded back perspective view of a case body. (a) is a partially enlarged rear view of the second projection, (b) is a side view of the second projection viewed in the direction of arrow XXVIIIb in FIG. 28 (a), and (c) is a ) is a cross-sectional view of the second projection taken along line XXVIIIc-XXVIIIc of FIG. (a) is a front view of the shaft and the retaining ring in the second embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the shaft and the retaining ring taken along the line XXIXb-XXIXb of FIG. 29 (a), and (c ) is a front view of the shaft and the retaining ring in the third embodiment, and (d) is a sectional view of the shaft and the retaining ring taken along line XXIXd-XXIXd of FIG. 29(c).

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 28. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. The general winning opening 63, the first ball opening 64, the second ball opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. reference). The general winning hole 63, the first ball-entering hole 64, the second ball-entering hole 640, the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged on the game board. 13 is fixed by a wood screw or the like from the front side.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is formed by dividing the front surface of the game board 13 by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin arc member (not shown) formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is a substantially circular area (area where a winning hole or the like is arranged and the shot ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. In addition, in the state of the pachinko machine 10, between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, an arc connecting the rails is formed on the inner surface side of the resin. A circular arc member made of .

Two first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are arranged in the upper right part of the game area in front view (the upper right part in FIG. 2). The first pattern display device 37A is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Aa and a 7-segment display 37Ab, which are light emitting means. The other first symbol display device 37B is similarly provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Ba and a 7-segment display 37Bb, which are light emitting means.

The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying in accordance with each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. ing. Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Both of the plurality of LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba indicate by the lighting state whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variable, the time saving or the normal state, or indicate by the lighting state whether it is changing or not, and the stop pattern is variable. The lighting state indicates whether the pattern corresponds to the big win, the pattern corresponds to the normal jackpot, or the winning pattern, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display devices 37Ab and 37Bb both display the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba are configured to emit light of different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the colors of light, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is conducted when a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big win as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but also indicate a symbol corresponding to the type of the big win in the case of a big win.

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, and the second entrance A game state in which a ball is likely to enter 640. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or during the time reduction, not only the probability of winning the second symbol is increased, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be in a state where it is easy to hit the ball. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 during the probability change or during the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened more than during normal operation. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened and once per hit. It is also possible to change at least one of the number of times to perform. In addition, during the probability change or during the time saving, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per time is not set, and the second symbol is used. Only the winning probability may be changed so as to be increased compared to normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that variably displays three patterns, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 displays the gaming state under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is displayed in a predetermined manner. It is configured to be activated (released) only for a period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more chances to open the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the variable probability and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the state is such that the ball can easily enter the ball, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the balls flowing down the right side of the game board among the balls launched to the game board can pass through. . When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol reservation lamp (not shown) is also lit. Is displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Also, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reserved lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball inlet 64, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first ball entrance 64 in front view, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is provided. When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first ball entry hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640 are also one of winning holes through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are different numbers, for example , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is five. may

The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for a ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), which makes it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 .

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ ' is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the probability change and the time reduction than during normal times.

Here, the probability of a big win when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, both in a low probability state and a high probability state. are identical. However, the probability that the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is higher than the probability that the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a big win. set higher than the case. On the other hand, the first ball entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second ball entrance 640, and is in a state in which a ball can be entered at all times.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640. A ball is shot toward the opening 64 so as to pass through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by entering the first ball opening 64, there are many opportunities for a big winning lottery. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second ball entrance 640 is easy to enter. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the second ball entrance 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting"), passes through the through gate 67, and the electric accessory is in an open state, and it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by entering a ball into the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A variable prize winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large opening) 65a is provided in the approximate center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 results in a big win, the jackpot lottery is won after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses. The LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A or the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B is lit so as to become a stop symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the occurrence of the big win is made. shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and both. The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time when the LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba corresponding to the big win are lit in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. , a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a special game state. Moreover, the number of the specific prize winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and a plurality (for example, two) may be arranged. The left side of 80 is also acceptable.

Affixing spaces K1 and K2 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided in the center and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps etc. affixed to the affixing space K1 It can be visually recognized through a small window 35 (see FIG. 1) of the frame 14 .

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through an out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 executes major processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device. do.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the front side of the opening and closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the side, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. do.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

FIG. 5 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, showing a state in which the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 of the arm operation unit 300 are arranged at the first position.

As shown in FIG. 5, the arm operation unit 300 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13 (the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 5), and moves the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 between the first position and the second position. formed displaceable between.

At the first position, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 protrude toward the center of the game board 13, as shown in FIG. While arranged in the front center of the three-symbol display device 81, at the second position, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are retracted to the side of the third-symbol display device 81 and retracted to the back side of the game board 13. be done. Along with this, the first rotating decorative body 540 and the second rotating decorative body 550 are rendered invisible to the player (see FIG. 2).

Next, a detailed configuration of the arm operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 28. FIG.

6 and 7 are perspective views of the arm operation unit 300 with the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 arranged at the first position, and FIGS. 8 and 9 are perspective views of the first arm 500 and the second arm 600. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the arm operating unit 300 with the arm 600 arranged at the second position; 7 and 9 show a state in which the first cover body 420 and the second cover body 440 are removed.

As shown in FIGS. 6 to 9, the arm operation unit 300 includes a box-shaped first base body 410 open on one side, and a first base body 410 fastened and fixed to one side of the first base body 410. A first cover body 420 that closes an open portion, a second base body 430 that is detachably connected to the first base body 410 and has a partial box shape with one side open, and one side of the second base body 430. A case member 400 is formed by these members 410 , 420 , 430 , 440 , which are fastened and fixed to the side and close the open portion (box-shaped portion) of the second base member 430 . Each member 410, 420, 430, 440 is made of a light transmissive material.

The case member 400 includes a first arm 500 and a second arm 600, a gear member 700 connected to the first arm 500, and a drive motor 900 that imparts rotational driving force to the gear member 700 via a reduction gear 800. and are arranged.

The first arm 500 is rotatably supported by the first base body 410 and the first cover body 420 via an arm shaft 520, and is centered on the arm shaft 520 at a first position (see FIGS. 6 and 7) and a first position. It is displaceable between two positions (FIGS. 8 and 9). Here, the first arm 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG.

10(a) is a front perspective view of the first arm 500, and FIG. 10(b) is a rear perspective view of the first arm 500. FIG. 11(a) is a partially enlarged front perspective view in which the distal end side of the first arm 500 is in an exploded state, and FIG. Fig. 3 is a rear perspective view enlarged in perspective;

As shown in FIG. 10, the first arm 500 includes a main body member 510 made of a resin material, an arm shaft 520 that rotatably supports the main body member 510 on the first base body 410, and a main body portion 510. A rotating mechanism 530 disposed on the tip side, a first rotating decoration body 540 rotationally driven by the rotating mechanism 530, and a second rotating decoration body 550 disposed on the back side of the first rotating decoration body 540. and

The main body member 510 includes a connecting side main body 511, a swinging side main body 512 connected to an end of the connecting side main body 511, and an end of the swinging side main body 512 opposite to the connecting side main body 511. The connecting body 511, the swinging side body 512, and the housing body 513 are integrally formed from a resin material.

The connection-side main body 511 is a portion formed in a long flat plate shape, and a guide groove 511 a opened in the plate surface extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the connection-side main body 511 . A protruding pin 730 of the gear member 700 is inserted through the guide groove 511a (see FIG. 19), and the connecting side main body 511 and the gear member 700 are connected via the guide groove 511a and the protruding pin 730. As shown in FIG.

The connecting-side main body 511 is provided with a wall portion 511b which is continuous along the outer edge of the flat plate-like portion and the inner edge of the guide groove 511a and which has a rectangular rib shape in cross section. As a result, the rigidity of the connecting-side main body 511 is improved, so that twisting deformation of the connecting-side main body 511 when the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a is pressed by the protruding pin 730 can be suppressed. Therefore, the projecting pin 730 of the gear member 700 can be smoothly moved along the guide groove 511a. In addition, by providing the wall portion 511b along the outer edge of the flat plate shape and the inner edge of the guide groove 511a in this way, the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a can be achieved while ensuring the rigidity of the connection-side main body 511 and reducing the weight. , the pressure-receiving area pressed by the protruding pin 730 can be secured, and as a result, the durability of the connecting-side main body 511 and the gear member 700 (protruding pin 730) can be improved.

The rocking side main body 512 is formed in such a shape that the side connected to the connecting side main body 511 is curved in an arc shape and the side opposite to the connecting side main body 511 is bent in a dogleg shape. The arm shaft 520 is integrally formed at the connecting portion between the swing-side main body 512 and the connecting-side main body 511, and extends vertically from the plate-like portions of the connecting-side main body 511 and the swing-side main body 512 toward the rear side. be erected.

Here, the swing-side main body 512 is formed in a flat-plate-like shape parallel to the flat-plate-like portion of the connecting-side main body 511 and continues along the outer edge of the flat-plate-like portion and is erected from the flat-plate-like portion. A hollow box with a rectangular cross section having an internal space is formed from a substrate having rib-shaped walls with a rectangular cross section and a flat plate body fastened and fixed to the upstanding tip side of the wall of the substrate. .

As a result, the section modulus of the swing-side main body 512 is ensured to prevent bending deformation, and the weight of the swing-side main body 512 is reduced. load can be reduced. Therefore, since the length dimension of the swing-side main body 512 can be increased, the amount of movement of the front decoration 540 and the like accompanying the displacement of the first arm 500 can be increased, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Further, since the swing-side main body 512 has a hollow box shape, the internal space is used to route the electrical wiring (power supply line, signal line, etc., not shown) of the rotating mechanism 530 ( wiring). As a result, damage to the electrical wiring can be suppressed. In particular, in this embodiment, after the electrical wiring of the rotating mechanism 530 is passed through the internal space of the swinging side main body 512, it is connected to the end of the swinging side main body 512 (that is, the connecting side main body 511). part, where the arm shaft 520 is formed). The arm shaft 520 is the center of rotation of the first arm 500 and is the portion where the displacement of the first arm 500 is the minimum. It is possible to improve the durability of the wiring lead-out portion.

The container 513 is arranged on the tip side of the swing-side main body 512 (that is, the end opposite to the end connected to the connecting-side main body 511), and is formed in a cylindrical shape that is circular when viewed from the front. A rotating mechanism 530 that imparts a rotational driving force to the first rotating decorative body 540 is disposed in the internal space of the shape. A detailed configuration of the rotation mechanism 530 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 12 to 16. FIG.

The container 513 includes a large-diameter portion 513a to which the swing-side main body 512 is connected to the outer peripheral surface, a small-diameter portion 513b having an outer peripheral surface smaller in diameter than the large-diameter portion 513a, and the large-diameter portion 513a and the small-diameter portion 513b. A stepped portion 513c formed as a flat end surface perpendicular to the axis is provided between them, and the second main body 551 of the second rotary decoration 550 is rotatably fitted on the small diameter portion 513b.

The first rotating decorative body 540 is disposed on the tip side (accommodating body 513) of the first arm 500, and is a member that performs an effect by rotation. It has a shaft-shaped shaft 542 located in the center and protruding from the rear side, and a first decorative portion 543 that decorates the front side of the first main body 541 . A rotational driving force is applied to the shaft 542 from the rotation mechanism 530, so that the first rotary decorative body 540 (first decorative portion 543) is rotated relative to the container 513 (first arm 500).

In the present embodiment, the first decorative portion 543 is formed on the front side of the first main body 541 so that a plurality of tapered sharp-angled bodies radially extend outward from the center in the radial direction. In addition, the first decorative portion 543 is partially formed of a light-transmitting material on the front side so that light emitted from an LED (not shown) disposed inside can be visually recognized.

The second rotating decorative body 550 is arranged coaxially with the shaft body 542 on the back side of the first rotating decorative body 540, and is a member that performs an effect by rotation. It has a flat plate-like extending portion 552 that extends radially outward from the outer peripheral side of the second main body 551 , and a second decorative portion 553 that decorates the outer peripheral side of the second main body 551 . An end portion of a second arm 600, which will be described later, is rotatably connected to the extended distal end of the extended portion 552 (see FIG. 17).

The second rotary decorative body 550 is rotatably supported by the container 513 by fitting the second main body 551 onto the small-diameter portion 513b of the container 513, as described above. In this case, when the shaft 542 of the first rotary decoration 540 is connected to the rotating mechanism 530, the second rotary decoration 550 (second main body 551) is the first main body 541 of the first rotary decoration 540. Movement in the axial direction is restricted between the back surface and the stepped portion 513c of the container 513 . That is, the second rotary decoration 550 is rotatably held between the first rotary decoration 540 and the container 513 .

In addition, since the second rotating decorative body 550 is disposed on the back side of the first rotating decorative body 540 (that is, on the game board 13 side), the second arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced. The trajectory of the second arm 600 or the extension part 552 overlaps the first rotary decoration body 540, and the first decoration part 543 of the first rotation decoration body 540 is prevented from being partially hidden by the second arm 600 or the extension part 552. can. That is, while the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced, the entire first rotary decoration pair 540 (first decoration portion 543) can be exposed.

Next, referring to FIGS. 12 to 16, the rotation mechanism 530 and the connection structure between the rotation mechanism 530 and the shaft 542 of the first rotary decoration 540 will be described. 12 is a partially enlarged rear view of the container 513 of the first arm 500, and FIG. 13 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the connecting portion between the wheel gear 533 of the rotating mechanism 530 and the shaft 542 of the first rotating decorative body 540. It is a diagram. 13, illustration of the first main body 541 and the first decoration portion 543 of the first rotary decoration body 540 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the rotation mechanism 530 includes a drive motor 531 that generates rotational driving force, a worm gear 532 that is axially attached to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 531, and the worm gear 532 that is engaged with the drive motor 531. Also, a wheel gear 533 in which the shaft 542 of the first rotary decoration 540 is inserted, and a retaining ring 534 that functions as a stopper for the shaft 542 of the first rotary decoration 540 inserted in the wheel gear 533. Prepare. The worm gear 532 is formed as a worm (screw gear), and the wheel gear 533 is formed as a worm wheel (helical gear).

The wheel gear 533 is disposed in the central portion of the container 513, and the shaft 542 of the first rotary decoration 540 is inserted into the insertion hole 533b (see FIG. 14) of the wheel gear 533 from the front side of the container 513. Interpolation (insertion) is performed (see FIG. 11). A retaining ring 534 is fitted in a circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 542 inserted into the wheel gear 533, thereby restricting the shaft body 542 from slipping out of the insertion hole 533b of the wheel gear 533 in the axial direction.

The detailed configuration of the shaft 542 and the wheel gear 533 of the first rotary decoration 540 will be described with reference to FIG. 14 . 14(a) is a top view of the shaft 542, FIG. 14(b) is a front view of the shaft 542 as seen in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14(a), and FIG. It is a side view of the shaft 542 seen in the direction of arrow XIVc in FIG. 14(a). FIG. 14(d) is a top view of the wheel gear 533, FIG. 14(e) is a cross-sectional view of the wheel gear 533 taken along line XIVe-XIVe of FIG. 14(d), and FIG. It is a front view of the wheel gear 533 seen in the direction of arrow XIVf in FIG. 14(d). 14(g) is a top view of the retaining ring 534. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 14( a ) to 14 ( c ), the shaft 542 is a cylindrical shaft-shaped body (that is, a shaft-shaped body with a circular cross section) whose outer surface partially extends in the axial direction (FIGS. 14( b ) and 14 ( c )). FIG. 14 (c) vertical direction) is a flat surface 542a that is parallel to the D-shaped cross-sectional portion 542b that is formed in a D-shaped cross section, and the outer surface of the D-shaped cross-sectional portion b along the circumferential direction. and a circumferential groove 542c having a U-shaped cross section which is continuously recessed and is formed of a brass material.

The flat surface 542a is formed in a predetermined range from the axial end surface (upper surface) of the shaft 542 along the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 14(b)). That is, the flat surface 542a is also formed on the tip side (upper surface side) of the shaft body 542 relative to the circumferential groove 542c. The tip of the shaft 542 (D-shaped cross section 542b) in the axial direction is tapered by chamfering (C-face machining) the corners. As a result, the work of inserting into the insertion hole 533b can be performed smoothly.

As shown in FIGS. 14(d) to 14(f), the wheel gear 533 includes a cylindrical base portion 533c having an insertion hole 533b in the center and gears engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the base portion 533c. and a projecting portion 533e projecting along the axial direction (vertical direction in FIGS. 14(e) and 14(f)) from the axial end surface of the base portion 533c, and is formed of a resin material. be.

The insertion hole 533b has a flat surface 533a that is a plane parallel to the axial direction so that the D-shaped cross section 542b of the shaft 542 can be inserted. It is formed to have a D-shaped cross section. As a result, when the D-shaped cross-sectional portion 542b of the shaft 542 is inserted into the insertion hole 533b, the flat surface 542a of the shaft 542 and the flat surface 533a of the insertion hole 532b are engaged with each other, whereby the shaft 542 and the hole gear are engaged. 533 to transmit driving torque.

The projecting portion 533e is such that the step in the state where the shaft 542 is inserted into the insertion hole 533b to the limit position (that is, the terminal end of the flat surface 542a of the shaft 542 (lower end in FIG. 14(b)) is the lower surface of the wheel gear 533 ( The projection height is set so as to project in the axial direction from the upper surface of the shaft body 542 when it is in contact with the axial end surface (lower side surface in FIG. 14(e)) (see FIG. 13).

A flat surface 533e1, which is a plane parallel to the axial direction, is formed on the protrusion 533e on the insertion hole 533b side (that is, the side facing the shaft 542). are formed continuously (that is, on the same plane) with the flat surface 533a formed in the insertion hole 533b. As a result, the flat surface 533e1 formed on the protruding portion 533e and the flat surface 533a formed on the insertion hole 533b can simultaneously engage with the flat surface 542a formed on the D-shaped cross-sectional portion 542b of the shaft 542. be.

On the other hand, the protruding portion 533e is formed such that the rear surface opposite to the flat surface 533e1 (the outer peripheral surface, the right side surface in FIG. 14(d)) continues to the outer peripheral surface of the base portion 533c. As will be described later, the projecting portion 533e is a portion that receives a load when the retaining ring 534 is attached or when rotational torque is transmitted between the shaft body 542 and the wheel gear 533, ensuring durability. There is a need to. Therefore, the projecting portion 533e is formed at a position that is in phase with the flat surface 533a in the insertion hole 533b of the wheel gear 533. As shown in FIG.

That is, in the portion of the wheel gear 533 where the flat surface 533a is formed in the insertion hole 533b, the base portion 533c is the thickest in the radial direction (left-right direction in FIGS. 14(d) and 14(e)). maximum) and strength is ensured. Therefore, by forming the projecting portion 533e at a portion of the insertion hole 533b that is in the same phase as the flat surface 533a, the load acting from the projecting portion 533e can be received by a thick portion that ensures strength. , the durability of the wheel member 533 can be improved accordingly. Further, if the position of the insertion hole 533b is in the same phase as the flat surface 533a, the cross-sectional area of the protrusion 533e can be increased. It is possible to improve the quality.

As shown in FIG. 14(g), the retaining ring 534 includes an annular portion 534b formed by cutting a part of the annular shape to form an open end 534a, and an inner peripheral side of the annular portion 534b. It is formed as an E-shaped retaining ring having projecting portions 534c projecting radially inward from three locations. The retaining ring 534 is manufactured by punching out an E shape shown in FIG. However, the retaining ring 534 may be made of a steel material or an aluminum alloy material.

The projecting ends of the three projecting portions 534c are formed in concentric circular arc shapes, and the imaginary circle formed by connecting the projecting ends is slightly smaller than the diameter of the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 542. be. Therefore, when the retaining ring 534 is fitted into the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 542, the bottom surface of the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 542 is pressed by the arc-shaped projecting tip of the projecting portion 534c of the retaining ring 534. . That is, the snap ring 534 can be rotated together with the shaft body 542 until the pressing force is exceeded by the overhanging tip of the overhanging portion 534c being in close contact with the bottom surface of the circumferential groove 542c (from the shaft body 542). Rotational torque can be transmitted to the protrusion 533e via the retaining ring 534).

A process of connecting the shaft 542 of the first rotary decoration 540 to the rotation mechanism 530 will be described with reference to FIG. 15 . 15(a) to 15(c) are partially enlarged top views of the wheel gear 533. FIG.

15(a) shows the state before the snap ring 534 is attached to the shaft 542, and FIG. 15(b) shows the state after the snap ring 534 is attached to the shaft 542. . FIG. 15(c) is a reference diagram of the rotation mechanism 530, showing a form in which the protrusion 533e is omitted. FIGS. 15(a) to 15(c) schematically illustrate a state in which the distance between the flat surfaces 533a, 533e1 of the wheel gear 533 and the flat surface 542a of the shaft 542 is enlarged.

In the step of connecting the shaft 542 of the first rotary decoration 540 to the rotation mechanism 530, first, the first rotary decoration 540 is attached to the front side of the container 513 while the second rotary decoration 550 is interposed ( See Figure 11). As a result, the D-shaped cross-sectional portion 542b of the shaft body 542 of the first rotary decorative body 540 inserted through the insertion hole 533b of the wheel gear 533 is aligned with the axial end face (upper surface of FIG. 15A) of the wheel gear 533. ), a retaining ring 534 is fitted into a circumferential groove 542c formed in the D-shaped end face portion 542b.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15A, with the open end 534a facing the shaft 542, the snap ring 534 is placed on the side opposite to the projection 533e (at a phase of 180° relative to the projection 533e). 15(b), the retaining ring 534 is fitted into the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft 542 (see FIG. 13).

In this case, according to this embodiment, one arm of the needle-nose pliers is engaged with the rear surface of the protrusion 533e (the surface opposite to the flat surface 533e1), and the other arm of the needle-nose pliers is attached to the retaining ring 534. By locking the rear side of (the side opposite to the open end 534a) and bringing the one and other arms close to each other, the retaining ring 534 can be fitted into the circumferential groove 542c.

That is, since the shaft 542 is not directly locked by the arms of the needle nose pliers, damage to the surface of the shaft 542 and bending of the shaft 542 (bending of the axis) can be suppressed. In particular, since the shaft body 542 is made of a brass material and is easily plastically deformed, the surface thereof is likely to be damaged or deformed by bending, which is effective. Further, the projecting portion 533e is formed integrally with the wheel gear 533, that is, is formed from a resin material, so that it is possible to prevent the engaged arms of the needle nose pliers from slipping. Therefore, it is possible to improve workability when fitting the retaining ring 534 .

As shown in FIG. 15(b), when the retaining ring 534 is attached to the shaft 542, the projection 533e is positioned between the opposite opening ends 534a of the retaining ring 534, so that the retaining ring 534 is attached to the shaft. 542 can be prevented from falling off from the circumferential groove 542c.

Here, in the shaft body 542 (D-shaped stepped surface portion 542b), there is a region where the recess depth of the circumferential groove 542c is reduced by the amount of the flat surface 542a formed. That is, between the D-shaped section 542b and the retaining ring 534, there is a relative rotational position where the engagement between the two is easily released. The engagement allowance with is reduced. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(c) as a reference example, when the snap ring 534 is rotatable relative to the shaft 542 without the projection 533e, the tension of the snap ring 534 is 1. A relative rotational position can be formed in which the protruding portion 534c is positioned on the flat surface 542a of the shaft body 542. In this relative rotational position, as a whole, the engagement margin between the protruding portion 534c and the inner wall surface of the circumferential groove 542c is large. Decrease. Therefore, if a load is applied to the shaft 542 in a direction in which it escapes from the insertion hole 533b of the wheel gear 533, the snap ring 534 may slip out of the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft 542 in the axial direction. In such a relative rotation position, even if no load is applied to the shaft body 542 in a pulling-out direction, the retaining ring 534 may fall off due to the contact of another member or the like with the retaining ring 534 .

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the protrusion 533e is positioned between the opposing opening ends 534a of the retaining ring 534 fitted in the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft 542, so that the opening end 534a of the retaining ring 534 is brought into contact with the protrusion 533e to suppress the relative rotation of the retaining ring 534 with respect to the shaft 542. As a result, the relative rotational position between the shaft 542 and the retaining ring 534 can be maintained at an appropriate position, so that the retaining ring 534 can be prevented from falling out of the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft 542 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the connection structure between the rotating mechanism 530 (wheel gear 533) and the shaft 542 of the first rotating decorative body 540 will be described. 16(a) and 16(b) are partial enlarged top views of the rotation mechanism 530. In FIG. (b) shows the state after the shaft 542 has been rotated with respect to the wheel gear 533, respectively.

16(a) and 16(b), in order to facilitate understanding of the relative rotation state of the wheel gear 533 and the shaft 542, the gap between the flat surfaces 533a, 533e1 and the flat surface 542a is Schematically enlarged and illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 16(a) and 16(b), the wheel gear 533 has not only a flat surface 533a formed in the insertion hole 533b, but also a flat surface 533e1 connected to the flat surface 533a formed on the projecting portion 533e. Both flat surfaces 533a, 533e1 are engageable with the flat surface 542a in the D-shaped section 542b of the shaft 542 (see FIG. 14). That is, the area of engagement with the flat surface 542a of the shaft 542 can be increased by the amount of the flat surface 533e1 formed on the protrusion 533e, and the rotational torque can be dispersed accordingly. As a result, durability of the shaft 542 and the wheel gear 533 can be improved.

Further, as described above, the protrusion 533e that abuts the open end 534a of the retaining ring 534 and serves to suppress the relative rotation of the retaining ring 534 with respect to the shaft 542 is provided with the D-shaped cross section of the shaft 542. 542b is engaged with the flat surface 542a to also serve as a bearing for rotational torque. As a result, while improving the durability of the shaft 542 and the wheel gear 533, compared to the case where the base portion 533c of the wheel gear 533 is extended in the axial direction to secure the engagement area with the flat surface 542a. , miniaturization and weight reduction can be achieved.

Here, as described above, the retaining ring 534 is formed such that the projecting tips of the three projecting portions 534c can press the bottom surface of the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft 542. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when the retaining ring 534 is fitted into the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 542, the retaining ring 534 can be rotated together with the shaft body 542 (that is, the shaft body 542 can be rotated to the protrusion 533e via the retaining ring 534). torque can be transmitted).

As a result, the rotational torque transmitted between the wheel gear 533 and the shaft 542 is not received only between the flat surfaces 533a, 533e1 of the wheel gear 533 and the flat surface 542a of the shaft 542, but the wheel It can also be supported between the protrusion 533e of the gear 533 and the open end 534a of the retaining ring 534. As a result, the rotational torque can be distributed, and the durability of the shaft 542 and the wheel gear 533 can be improved accordingly.

Further, in order to increase the engagement area of the flat surfaces 533a and 542a and improve the durability, as described above, the size and weight of the wheel gear 533 (base portion 533c) are increased. As in the present embodiment, the retaining ring 534, which serves to prevent the shaft 542 from coming off, also serves to bear the rotational torque. can be improved.

Here, the mechanism for rotating the first rotating decorative body 540 (first decorative portion 543) is large because the first decorative portion 543 is relatively large and heavy in order to function as a decorative body. Durability is required to withstand rotational torque. On the other hand, since the mechanism is arranged at the tip position when the first arm 500 is displaced around the arm axis 520, it should be lightweight in order to suppress the inertial force when the first arm 500 is displaced. is required.

On the other hand, according to the rotating mechanism 530 of the present embodiment, as described above, the flat surface 533e1 of the protrusion 533e and the retaining ring 534 can be used to receive the rotating torque, thereby ensuring durability. At the same time, the inertial force can be reduced by reducing the weight, and the displacement of the first arm 500 can be performed smoothly.

Returning to FIG. 6 to FIG. 9, description will be made. One end of the second arm 600 is rotatably supported by the extending portion 552 (see FIG. 11) of the second rotating decorative body 550, and the other end is connected to the second base body 430 and the second cover body 440 so as to be displaceable. be done. That is, as the first arm 500 is displaced around the arm shaft 520, the pivotal support portion at one end is relatively rotated, while the other end is displaceable along the guide groove 431 of the second base member 430. be. Here, the second arm 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 17 .

17(a) is a front perspective view of the second arm 600, and FIG. 17(b) is a rear perspective view of the second arm 600. FIG. As shown in FIG. 17, the second arm 600 includes a main body member 610 made of a resin material in an elongated shape, a fixed decoration 620 fixed to one end of the main body member 610, and the other end of the main body portion 610. and a guide body 630 which is a columnar body with a circular cross section and protrudes toward the rear side.

The main body member 610 has a flat plate-shaped portion arranged on the front side of the main body member 610 and a rib-shaped wall having a rectangular cross section that continues along the outer edge of the flat plate-shaped portion and stands from the flat plate-shaped portion. A hollow box having a rectangular cross-section and having an internal space is formed from a base body having a portion and a flat plate body fastened and fixed to the upstanding tip side of the wall portion of the base body.

As a result, the section modulus of the main body member 610 is ensured to prevent bending deformation, while the weight of the main body member 610 is reduced, and the load on the drive motor 900 when displacing the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 is reduced. can. In addition, since the main body member 610 has a hollow box shape, the internal space can be used to route (wire) the electrical connection lines of the fixed decorative body 620 . As a result, damage to the electrical wiring can be suppressed.

The fixed decorative body 620 is a member arranged on the tip side (one end side) of the second arm 600 (main body member 610), and has a connecting pin 621 which is a cylindrical body with a circular cross section projecting from the rear surface thereof. Prepare. The connecting pin 621 is pivotally supported via the collar C1 in the pivot hole 552a opened at the extending tip of the extending portion 552 of the second rotary ornament 550, so that one end of the second arm 600 is connected to the first arm. It is connected to the arm 500 (the second rotary decoration 550) so as to be relatively rotatable.

In addition, in this embodiment, the fixed decorative body 620 is formed in a form in which star shapes are superimposed concentrically. In addition, the fixed decorative body 620 is partially formed of a light-transmitting material on the front side so that light emission from an LED (not shown) disposed inside can be visually recognized.

A pair of guide bodies 630 are arranged at a predetermined interval. This guide body 630 is displaceably inserted into the guide groove 431 of the second base body 430 via the collar C2, so that the other end of the second arm 600 can slide along the guide groove 431. , and is connected to the second base body 430 (see FIGS. 6 to 9).

In addition, in the first position where the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 protrude in front of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIGS. 5 to 7), the fixed decorative body 620 side of the pair of collars C2 The positioned collar C2 abuts against the upper end (the upper side in FIG. 7) of the guide groove 431 of the second base body 430, and is restricted from further movement, while the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 move toward the third symbol. In the second position retracted to the side of the display device 81 (the back of the game board 13) (see FIGS. 2, 8 and 9), it is located on the opposite side of the fixed decoration 620 in the pair of collars C2. The collar C2 abuts against the lower end (lower side in FIG. 9) of the guide groove 431 of the second base body 430, and its further movement is restricted.

Returning to FIG. 6 to FIG. 9, description will be made. The gear member 700 , the reduction gear 800 and the drive motor 900 are each pivotally supported by the first base body 410 , and the gear member 700 is connected to the first arm 500 via the projecting pin 730 . Here, the gear member 700, the reduction gear 800 and the drive motor 900 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. FIG.

18 is a front perspective view of the gear member 700, the reduction gear 800 and the drive motor 900 attached to the first base body 410, and FIG. 19 is a gear member with the first arm 500 connected. 700 is a front view.

As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, a pinion gear 920 is fixed to a drive shaft 910 of a drive motor 900, and one of two reduction gears 800 meshing with each other is attached to the pinion gear 920. 800 are meshed. A gear member 700 is meshed with the other reduction gear 800 of the two reduction gears 800 .

Therefore, when the drive shaft 910 of the drive motor 900 is rotationally driven, the rotational driving force of the drive shaft 910 is transmitted to the gear member 700 via the pinion gear 920 and the reduction gear 800, and the gear member 700 is rotated. .

A rotation position detection sensor S is arranged on the side of the gear member 700 on the first base body 410 . The rotational position detection sensor S is an optical sensor having a light emitting portion Sa and a light receiving portion Sb. By arranging on the trajectory, the rotational position of gear member 700 is detected based on the presence or absence of detected portion 720 (flat plate portion 723).

As shown in FIG. 19, the gear member 700 is connected to the first arm 500 (connection-side main body 511) via a protruding pin 730 inserted through the guide groove 511a. Therefore, when the gear member 700 is rotated, the first arm 500 causes the projecting pin 730 to move along the guide groove 511a and causes the connecting-side main body 511 to follow the movement trajectory of the projecting pin 730. As a result, , is displaced about the arm axis 520 (see FIGS. 6 to 9).

Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the detailed configuration of gear member 700 will be described. 20(a) is a front view of the gear member 700, FIG. 20(b) is a side view of the gear member 700 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. 20(a), and FIG. FIG. 20(a) is a cross-sectional view of the gear member 700 taken along line XXc-XXc of FIG. 20(a);

As shown in FIG. 20, the gear member 700 is rotatably arranged on the first base body 410 about a gear shaft 790 (see FIG. 18), and has teeth on its outer peripheral surface that can mesh with the reduction gear 800. A gear body 710 that is engraved, a detected portion 720 that protrudes radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the gear body 710, and a projection that protrudes upward from the detected portion 720 in parallel with the gear shaft 790. A setting pin 730 is provided, and the gear body 710, the detected portion 720, and the projecting pin 730 are integrally formed from a resin material.

The gear body 710 is formed in a disc shape, and a gear shaft 790 is fixed to a shaft hole penetrating through the center of the gear body 710 . The teeth engraved on the outer peripheral surface are formed within a central angle of 330 degrees around the shaft hole. On the upper surface of the gear body 710, four ribs extending radially from the shaft hole are erected to increase the rigidity of the whole.

The detected portion 720 is a portion to be detected by the rotational position detection sensor S, and includes a protruding base portion 721 protruding radially outward from a region on the outer peripheral surface of the gear body 710 where no teeth are formed, A pin receiving portion 722 connected to the projecting tip of the projecting base portion 721 and a flat plate portion 723 projecting radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the bottom surface side of the pin receiving portion 722 are provided.

The projecting base portion 721 is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape when viewed from above, and its thickness dimension (the vertical dimension in FIGS. 20(b) and 20(c)) is the same as the thickness dimension of the teeth of the gear body 710. . The pin receiving portion 722 is formed in a cylindrical shape and arranged in a posture in which the axis of the cylinder is parallel to the gear shaft 790 . The bottom surface side of the pin receiving portion 722 is partially cut away on the side to which the projecting base portion 721 is connected. The flat plate portion 723 is formed in a fan-shaped flat plate shape in top view that widens radially outward, and has a thickness smaller than the thickness of the teeth of the gear body 710 . Also, the bottom surface of the flat plate portion 723 is flush with the bottom surface of the pin receiving portion 722 .

The bottom surfaces of the pin receiving portion 722 and the flat plate portion 723 (the surface facing the first base body 410, the lower surface in FIGS. 20B and 20C), the outer peripheral surface of the pin receiving portion 722, and the flat plate portion The ridge line portion (that is, the bottom edge of the pin receiving portion 722 and the flat plate portion 723) where the side surfaces of 723 (the front side and the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 20(b)) intersect is formed to have an arcuate cross section. be. Therefore, as will be described later, when the bottom surface of the flat plate portion 723 comes into contact with the restricting rib 413 (see FIG. 21) due to the inclination of the gear member 700 (tilt of the detected portion 720), the flat plate portion It is possible to prevent the edge of the bottom surface of 723 from being caught on the regulation rib 413 . Therefore, the gear member 700 can be smoothly rotated.

The protruding pin 730 is formed in a cylindrical shape and arranged at a position eccentric from the gear shaft 790 . In this embodiment, the protruding pin 730 protrudes from the upper surface of the pin receiving portion 722 of the detected portion 720 . Projecting pin 730 is formed at a position where the axis of the cylinder is concentric with pin receiving portion 722 . Therefore, the projecting pin 730 is arranged in a posture parallel to the gear shaft 790 .

A structure for mounting gear body 700 to first base body 410 will be described with reference to FIG. 21(a) is a front view of the first base body 410, and FIG. 21(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first base body 410 taken along line XXIb-XXIb of FIG. 21(a). 21 shows a state in which only the gear member 700 and the rotational position detection sensor S are attached.

As shown in FIG. 21 , a bearing D is provided on the first base body 410 , and a gear shaft 790 is rotatably supported by the bearing D, so that the gear member 700 is mounted on the first base body 410 . It is arranged on the upper surface side. A retaining ring (not shown) is attached to a circumferential groove recessed in the tip of the gear shaft 790 (lower end in FIG. 21(b)). 790 is held on the first base body 410 .

A support rib 411 is erected on the upper surface of the first base body 410 , and the erected tip of the support rib 411 supports the bottom surface of the gear body 710 of the gear member 700 . The support rib 411 extends along an imaginary circle centered on the gear shaft 790 and is formed as a projection having a hemispherical cross section, so that the gear member 700 can be supported with a small rotational resistance.

A recessed portion 412 is formed in the first base body 410 so as to extend along the locus of movement of the pin receiving portion 720 and the flat plate portion 730 of the gear member 700 . A restriction rib 413 is erected on the upper surface of the recessed portion 412, and displacement of the detected portion 720 by a predetermined amount or more (displacement in the direction in which the detected portion 720 approaches the first base body 410, FIG. 21B ) downward displacement).

The restricting rib 413 extends along an imaginary circle centered on the gear shaft 790 (see FIG. 21(a)) and is formed as a ridge with a hemispherical cross section (see FIG. 21(b)). Specifically, the regulating rib 413 is located on an imaginary straight line connecting the axis of the gear shaft 790 and the axis of the projecting pin 730 (pin receiving portion 722), and is connected to the flat plate portion 723. It extends along the locus of movement of the bottom surface of the pin receiving portion 722 (hereinafter referred to as the “regulated portion P1”).

The support ribs 411 of the first base body 410 are in contact with the bottom surface of the gear body 710 of the gear member 700 to support the gear member 700 in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 21(b)). Rib 413 is formed so as to have a gap between it and the bottom surface of detected portion 720 of gear member 700 .

Here, when the gear member 700 is rotationally driven and the projecting pin 730 is moved along the guide groove 511a of the first arm 500 (see FIG. 19), the projecting pin 730 presses against the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a. Inclination occurs in the gear member 700 due to the action of the reaction force on the pin 730 . In particular, the portion to be detected 720 that protrudes radially outward is subject to collapse (bending deformation in a direction approaching the upper surface of the first base member 410).

In this case, according to the present embodiment, the first base body 410 has the regulating rib 413 erected along the locus of movement of the detected portion 720, so that the gear member 700 is tilted (the detected portion 420 is When it falls down), the detected portion 720 can be received by the restricting rib 413 . As a result, excessive inclination of the gear member 700 can be avoided while suppressing an increase in rotational resistance of the gear member 700, and damage to not only the detected portion 720 but also the gear shaft 790 and the tooth surface can be suppressed. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the gear member 700 from rotating in a state in which the tooth surfaces of the gear member 700 and the tooth surface of the reduction gear 800 are misaligned (a state of misalignment), the rotational resistance of the gear member 700 becomes excessive and the tooth surface of the reduction gear 800 is prevented from rotating. Abrasion of the surface can be suppressed.

In addition, excessive tilting of the gear member 700 can be effectively suppressed by arranging the restricting ribs 413 to receive the portion to be detected 720 where the displacement is maximum when the gear member 700 tilts. Further, in this way, the portion for exhibiting the function as the portion to be detected by the rotational position detection sensor S also serves as the portion for exhibiting the stopper function for suppressing the inclination of the gear member 700. , the structure can be simplified and the parts cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the parts for exerting these two functions are separately provided in two places.

As described above, a gap is formed between the standing tip of the regulating rib 413 and the bottom surface of the detected portion 720 of the gear member 700 . Therefore, when the gear member 700 is rotationally driven and the projecting pin 730 is moved along the guide groove 511a of the first arm 500, the reaction force to the projecting pin 730 pressing against the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a is reduced. When the effect is small, the gap between the bottom surface of the detected portion 720 and the upstanding tip of the restricting rib 413 can be maintained to avoid the occurrence of contact resistance. Thereby, the driving force of the driving motor 900 required for rotating the gear member 700 can be reduced.

Here, in the gear member 700, the projecting pin 730 may stand up from the gear main body 710, but in this embodiment, the projecting pin 730 stands up from the detected portion 720, so that the gear member 700 is rotated and the protruding pin 730 is moved along the guide groove 511a, and when the protruding pin 730 receives a reaction force from the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a, only the detected portion 720 is partially moved. By tilting the gear body 710 (gear shaft 790), tilting of the gear body 710 (gear shaft 790) can be easily suppressed. That is, deformation of the gear body 710 can be suppressed by concentrating the deformation on the detected portion 720 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the gear body 710 from rotating with the tooth flanks of the reduction gear 800 deviated from each other, resulting in excessive rotation resistance and wear of the tooth flanks.

On the other hand, the protruding pin 730 is positioned radially inward (left side in FIG. 21(b)) of the restricting rib 413 . That is, the regulating rib 413 (the regulated portion P1) is positioned radially outward (to the right in FIG. 21(b)) of the base of the projecting pin 730 when viewed in the axial direction of the gear shaft 790 of the gear member 700 .

Therefore, when the projecting pin 730 receives a reaction force from the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a, the regulated portion P1 of the detected portion 720 (that is, the portion closest to the first case portion 410 and The portion formed in a cylindrical shape and whose rigidity is ensured when it is received by the restricting rib 413 ) can be received by the restricting rib 413 . As a result, tilting of the gear member 700 can be effectively suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 21(a), the restricting rib 413 has a region beyond the rotational position detection sensor S (that is, the detected portion 720 (flat plate portion 723) of the gear member 700 is detected by the rotational position detection sensor S). When the gear member 700 is rotated while the protruding pin 730 receives a reaction force from the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a, the flat plate portion 723 of the detected portion 720 detects the rotational position. Collision with the sensor S (light receiving portion Sb) can be suppressed. Thereby, the reliability of detection of the rotational position of the gear member 700 can be enhanced.

Returning to FIG. 6 to FIG. 9, description will be made. When the gear member 700 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 7) by the rotational driving force of the driving motor 900 from the state (first position) shown in FIGS. The inner wall surface of 511a is pressed, and the first arm 500 is displaced around the gear shaft 520 (rotated counterclockwise around the gear shaft 520 in FIG. 7). The other end (guide body 630, see FIG. 17(b)) of the second arm 600 is slid downward (downward in FIG. 7) along the guide groove 431, so that the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 is placed in the second position shown in FIGS.

On the other hand, when the gear member 700 is reversely rotated (clockwise in FIG. 9) by the rotational driving force of the driving motor 900 from the state (second position) shown in FIGS. The inner wall surface of the groove 511a is pressed, and the first arm 500 is displaced around the gear shaft 520 (rotated clockwise around the gear shaft 520 in FIG. 7). The other end (guide body 630, see FIG. 17(b)) of the second arm 600 is slid upward (upward in FIG. 9) along the guide groove 431, so that the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 is placed in the first position shown in FIGS.

In this case, according to the present embodiment, the second rotating decorative body 550 rotatably disposed on the first arm 500 has an extension portion 552 of the second rotating decorative body 550 that extends from one end of the second arm 600 . is rotatably supported (see FIG. 17(b)), and the other end of the second arm 600 is slidably coupled along the guide groove 431 of the second base body 430 .

Therefore, when the first arm 500 is displaced with respect to the case member 400, the angle formed by the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 (that is, when one end of the second arm 600 is A straight line connecting the arm shaft 520 and the connection position (the position supported by the shaft support hole 552a and the connection pin 621; see FIGS. 11 and 17) and the above-mentioned connection position (the position supported by the shaft support hole 552a and the connection pin 621). angle formed by a straight line that connects the other end of the second arm 600 (guide body 630, see FIG. 17) to the second case body 630 (guide shaft 631). Accordingly, the second rotary decoration 550 can be relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to the first arm 500 .

Accordingly, the driving motor 900 that applies the driving force to the first arm 500 not only serves as a driving source for displacing the first arm 500 about the arm shaft 520, but also serves as a driving source for the second rotating decorative body 550. It can also serve as a drive source for moving (rotating) relative to one arm 500 . This eliminates the need to separately provide a drive motor only for rotating the second rotary decorative body 550 .

In this case, the first arm 500 is provided with the first rotary decoration 540 coaxially with the second rotary decoration 550, and the first rotary decoration 540 can be rotated independently by the rotation mechanism 530. It is formed. Therefore, the first decorative portion 543 and the second decorative portion 553 of the first rotary decoration body 540 and the second rotary decoration pair 550 are independently rotated on the same axis, and the first arm 500 is displaced. The game area can be moved linearly or curvedly, and as a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the first rotating decorative body 540 (first decorative portion 543) and the second rotating decorative pair 550 (second decorative portion 553) are set to rotate in the same direction and rotate in different directions. set to speed. As a result, the first rotary decoration body 540 (the first decoration portion 543) and the second rotary decoration pair 550 (the second decoration portion 553) are rotated at the same time as the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced. In this case, it is possible to give the player the impression that both of them rotate smoothly, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Here, the relative displacement (rotation) between the second rotating decorative body 550 and the first arm 500 is achievable. In this case, the present embodiment adopts a configuration in which the other end of the second arm 600 is slidably connected to the second base body 430 through the guide groove 431 of the second base pair 430 . As a result, compared to a configuration in which the other end of the second arm 600 is rotatably supported by the second base body 430, the displaceable amount of the first arm 500 can be increased. As the displacement amount of the first arm 500 increases, the rotation amount of the second rotary decoration 550 (second decoration portion 553) can also be increased. As a result, not only the presentation effect by the displacement of the first arm 500 itself, but also the presentation effect by the rotation of the second decorative portion 553 accompanying the displacement can be further enhanced.

When the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are in the first position shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the collar C2 positioned closer to the fixed decorative body 620 out of the pair of collars C2 is the first arm as described above. 2 It abuts on the upper end (upper side in FIG. 7) of the guide groove 431 of the base body 430, and further movement is restricted. In this case, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are also part of the outer surface of the arc-curved portion of the swing-side main body 512 of the first arm 500 (hereinafter referred to as "first position arm regulated portion P2"). ) is brought into contact with the notch end face of the outer wall of the first base body 410 (hereinafter referred to as "first position base restricted portion P3"), further movement is also restricted.

Further, in the second position shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are arranged such that the collar C2, which is located on the opposite side of the fixed decorative body 620 among the pair of collars C2, is positioned as described above. , the lower end (lower side in FIG. 9) of the guide groove 431 of the second base body 430, and further movement thereof is restricted. In this case, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are further connected to a portion of the outer peripheral surface of the container 513 of the first arm 500 (hereinafter referred to as "second position arm restricted portion P4", FIG. 10B). or see FIG. 11(b)) is in contact with the inner corner portion of the outer wall of the second base body 430 (hereinafter referred to as the "second position base regulated portion P5"; see FIGS. 6 and 7), A part of the main body member 610 of the second arm 600 (hereinafter referred to as “second position arm restricted portion P6”) is the inner surface of the outer wall of the second base body 430 (hereinafter referred to as “second position base restricted portion P7”). ) also restricts further movement.

Here, a structure for holding the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 arranged at the first position and the second position will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 25. FIG.

FIG. 22(a) is a front view of the first arm 500, the second arm 600, and the gear member 700 arranged at the first position, and FIG. 1 is a partially enlarged front view of 1 arm 500 and gear member 700. FIG. 23(a) is a front view of the first arm 500, the second arm 600, and the gear member 700 in a state in which the gear member 700 is rotated in the reverse direction from the state shown in FIG. 22(a), and FIG. 23(b). 23(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the first arm 500 and the gear member 700 at the XXIIIb portion of FIG. 23(a). FIG.

As shown in FIG. 22, in this embodiment, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 approach the first position from the predetermined position (that is, the gear member 700 rotates in the reverse direction (clockwise in FIG. 22(b)). 22), a straight line L1 connecting the axis of projecting pin 730 and the axis of arm shaft 520 and a line L2 connecting the axis of projecting pin 730 and the axis of gear shaft 790 The angle θ to form becomes large.

Therefore, when an external force acts on the first arm 500 and the external force is transmitted from the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a to the projecting pin 730 (gear member 700), the first arm 500 is close to the first position. As the state increases, the force component of the force generated in the gear member 700 in the direction to rotate the gear member 700 (that is, the force in the direction perpendicular to the straight line L2 connecting the axis of the protruding pin 730 and the axis of the gear shaft 790 increases). component) can be reduced. As a result, when holding the first arm 500 at the first position, the driving force required for the drive motor 900 to counteract the external force (for example, gravity) acting on the first arm 500 can be reduced. , the capacity of the drive motor 900 can be reduced and the energy consumption can be reduced accordingly.

Here, when starting to displace the first arm 500 in a stopped state, the load on the drive motor 900 increases due to the influence of inertia force and static friction force.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the first arm 500 is stopped (that is, the first position shown in FIG. 22), the straight line L1 connecting the axial center of the projecting pin 730 and the axial center of the arm shaft 520 and , the angle θ formed by the straight line L2 connecting the axis of the projecting pin 730 and the axis of the gear shaft 790 is large (that is, the reduction ratio is large). When starting (that is, rotating the gear member 700 forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 22B) from the state shown in FIG. 22), the load on the drive motor 900 can be reduced. Therefore, the capacity of the drive motor 900 can be reduced.

On the other hand, since the reduction ratio can be increased as described above, when the first arm 500 reaches the first position, even if the rotation speed of the gear member 700 is kept constant, the displacement speed of the first arm 500 is reduced. can be slowed down. Therefore, the impact generated when reaching the first position (in particular, the collision between the first position arm regulated portion P2 and the first position base regulated portion P3 and the collision of the collar C2 with the upper end of the guide groove 431) impact) can be suppressed, and durability can be improved.

The "predetermined position" when "the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 approach the first position from the predetermined position" is a straight line connecting the axis of the projecting pin 730 and the axis of the gear shaft 790. It means a state in which the axial center of the gear shaft 790 is positioned on L2 (that is, a state in which the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 overlap).

As shown in FIG. 22, in this embodiment, when the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are arranged at the first position, the gear member 700 rotates in the reverse direction (FIG. 22(b)) in the guide groove 511a. clockwise rotation, rotation in the first direction) to form an area for the projecting pin 730 to move further.

Therefore, the gear member 700 is reversely rotated (rotated in the first direction) as shown in FIG. 23 from the state shown in FIG. 22 (where the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are arranged at the first position). , the projecting pin 730 is moved along the guide groove 511a, thereby moving the first position arm regulated portion P2 to the first position base regulated portion P3 and the collar C2 to the upper end of the guide groove 431, respectively. and can absorb the gap between the arm shaft 520 and its bearing, the gap between the projecting pin 730 and the guide groove 511a, and the like. That is, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 can be pushed from the second position toward the first position (leftward in FIG. 23(a)). As a result, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 can be firmly held at the first position by suppressing rattling.

As shown in FIG. 23, in this embodiment, after the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are arranged at the first position shown in FIG. 520 and a straight line L2 connecting the axial centers of the projecting pin 730 and the gear shaft 790 are perpendicular to each other (that is, the angle θ=90 degrees).

Therefore, even if an external force acts on the first arm 500 , the force component in the direction to rotate the gear member 700 (that is, the force component) is not generated, and the rotation of the gear member 700 can be restricted. As a result, since the first arm 500 can be mechanically maintained at the first position, the driving force of the drive motor 900 can be reduced (or released). As a result, the capacity of the drive motor 900 can be reduced and the energy consumption can be suppressed.

FIG. 24(a) is a front view of the first arm 500, the second arm 600, and the gear member 700 arranged at the second position, and FIG. 1 is a partially enlarged front view of 1 arm 500 and gear member 700. FIG. 25(a) is a front view of the first arm 500, the second arm 600, and the gear member 700 in a state in which the gear member 700 has been rotated forward from the state shown in FIG. 24(a), and FIG. 25(b). 25(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the first arm 500 and the gear member 700 at the XXVb portion of FIG. 25(a). FIG.

According to the present embodiment, even in the second position shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the same effect as in the case of the first position shown in FIGS. 22 and 23 can be obtained.

That is, as shown in FIG. 24, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 approach the second position from the predetermined position (that is, the gear member 700 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 24(b)) and ), the angle θ between the straight lines L1 and L2 increases.

Therefore, even if an external force acts on the first arm 500, the closer the first arm 500 is to the second position, the smaller the force component in the direction of rotating the gear member 700 (the force component in the direction perpendicular to the straight line 2). can. As a result, the driving force required to hold the first arm 500 at the second position can be reduced, so that the capacity of the drive motor 900 can be reduced and the energy consumption can be reduced accordingly.

At the second position shown in FIG. 24, as in the case of the first position, the angle θ between the straight lines L1 and L2 is large (that is, the reduction ratio is large). The load required to start displacing the arm 500 (that is, rotate the gear member 700 in the reverse direction (clockwise in FIG. 22(b)) from the state shown in FIG. 24) is reduced, and the drive motor 900 can be reduced in size. In addition, by increasing the speed reduction ratio, the impact when reaching the second position (in particular, the collision between the second position arm regulated portions P4 and P6 and the second position base regulated portions P5 and P7, and It is possible to suppress the impact caused by the collision of the collar C2 against the lower end of the guide groove 431, thereby improving the durability.

Note that the "predetermined position" when "the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 approach the second position from the predetermined position" mentioned above means the axial center of the protruding pin 730 and the gear shaft, as in the case described above. It means a state where the axis of the gear shaft 790 is located on the straight line L2 connecting the axes of the gear shaft 790 (that is, the state where the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 overlap).

As shown in FIG. 24, in the present embodiment, when the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are arranged at the second position, the gear member 700 rotates forward (FIG. 24(b)) in the guide groove 511a. counterclockwise rotation, rotation in a second direction) to form an area for the projecting pin 730 to move further.

Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 24 (where the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are arranged at the second position), the gear member 700 is rotated forward (rotated in the second direction) as shown in FIG. , the projecting pin 730 is moved along the guide groove 511a to move the second position arm restricted portions P4 and P6 to the second position base restricted portions P5 and P7, respectively, and the collar C2 to the lower end of the guide groove 431. In addition, they can absorb the gap between the arm shaft 520 and its bearing, the gap between the projecting pin 730 and the guide groove 511a, and the like. That is, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 can be pushed from the first position to the second position (rightward in FIG. 25(a)). As a result, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 can be firmly held at the second position by suppressing rattling.

As shown in FIG. 25, in this embodiment, after the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are arranged at the second position shown in FIG. , angle θ=90 degrees). Therefore, even if an external force acts on the first arm 500, the force component in the direction to rotate the gear member 700 (the force component in the direction orthogonal to the straight line L2) is not generated, and the rotation of the gear member 700 can be restricted. can. As a result, since the first arm 500 can be mechanically maintained at the second position, the driving force of the drive motor 900 can be reduced (or released). As a result, the capacity of the drive motor 900 can be reduced and the energy consumption can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, since the guide groove 511a extends linearly, after the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are arranged at the first position shown in FIG. When (rotated in the first direction) and brought into the state of FIG. 23, the projecting pin 730 can be gradually pressed against the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a. That is, the first position arm regulated portion P2 is pressed against the first position base regulated portion P3, and the collar C2 is pressed against the upper end of the guide groove 431, and the gap between the arm shaft 520 and its bearing, and the protrusion. The operation of absorbing the gap between the pin 730 and the guide groove 511a can be gradually progressed. Thereby, breakage of each part can be suppressed. 24, the gear member 700 is further rotated in the forward direction (rotated in the second direction), and the state shown in FIG. 25 is obtained. The parts P4 and P6 are pushed against the second position base regulated parts P5 and P7, and the collar C2 is pushed against the lower end of the guide groove 431, the gap between the arm shaft 520 and its bearing, the projecting pin 730 and the guide. The action of absorbing the gap with respect to the groove 511a can be gradually progressed, thereby suppressing the breakage of each part.

Returning to FIG. 6 to FIG. 9, description will be made. As shown in FIG. 7, in the state where the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are arranged at the first position, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are connected to the first rotary ornament 540 and the second rotary The decorative body 550 and the fixed decorative body 620 are positioned outside the edge 433 of the second base body 430 (left side in FIG. 7), and as shown in FIG. In the second position, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 move the first rotating decorative body 540 and the second rotating decorative body 550 and the fixed decorative body 620 to the storage surface of the second base body 430 . 432.

Therefore, when the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced from the first position to the second position, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 pass through the edge 433 of the second base body 430. . In this case, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are each formed in an elongated shape, and the heavy object (the first arm 600) is placed at the position furthest apart from the fulcrum (arm shaft 520 and guide body 630) of the elongated bodies. rotating ornament 540, rotating mechanism 530, etc.) are provided. Therefore, when the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced from the first position to the second position, they tend to sway in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the game board 13). may collide with the edge 433 of the second base body 430 to cause damage, or may be locked by the edge 433 of the second base body 430 and become unable to be displaced.

It is conceivable that the edge portion 433 of the second base body 430 is not positioned on the displacement trajectory of the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 . However, enlarging the second base body 430 over the entire displacement area of the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 (that is, extending the position of the edge 433 leftward in FIGS. 7 and 9) is Since the display area of the pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is hidden by the second base body 430 (flat storage surface portion 432), this cannot be done. And retracting the second arm 600 outside the displacement trajectory (that is, retracting the position of the edge portion 433 to the right in FIGS. 7 and 9) is to move the second base body 430 (storage surface portion 432) to the back side. This cannot be done because the wiring and substrates disposed on the substrate are exposed and the appearance is spoiled. Here, a detailed configuration of the second base body 430 will be described with reference to FIG. 26 .

26(a) is a front view of the second base body 430, and FIG. 26(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second base body 430 taken along line XXVIb-XXVIb of FIG. 26(a). As shown in FIG. 26, when the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced from the first position to the second position, the second base body 430 has at least the first rotating decorative body 540 and the second rotating decorative body. 55 and the fixed decorative body 620, and includes an edge portion 433 formed along the outer edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2). 433 is curved to have an arcuate cross section.

As shown in FIG. 26(b), the edge portion 433 has a larger thickness dimension (vertical dimension in FIG. 26(b)) than the accommodation surface portion 432, and the entire thickness direction thereof is curved in an arcuate cross-section. formed by

As a result, while the opening for exposing the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is secured in the game area (game board 13), when the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced from the first position to the second position, In addition, even if the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 swayed in the front-rear direction collide with the edge 433 of the second base body 430, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are retracted due to the arc-shaped cross section. It can be guided toward the surface portion 432 to absorb the impact. Therefore, damage can be suppressed, and the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 can be prevented from being locked and stopped by the edge 433 of the second base body 430, and can be smoothly displaced.

Here, as shown in FIG. 26(a), the edge portion 433 has an outer edge (the left end in FIG. 26(a)) formed in a waveform shape in which a plurality of circular arc shapes are combined when viewed from the front. The surface (the front side of FIG. 26(a) on the paper surface) is also formed into a wave shape in which a plurality of circular arc shapes are combined. In this way, by applying a decorative shape to the outer edge and surface of the edge portion 433, even in the case where the edge portion 433 is formed to have a relatively large diameter and an arcuate cross section as in the present embodiment. Even if there is, it is possible to allow the player to recognize the arc-shaped cross-section and the decorative shape as an integrated design, and to prevent the edge 433 from being unnaturally conspicuous.

Further, the second base body 430 is made of a light-transmitting material, and the storage surface portion 432 on which the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced has a flat front surface. A continuous ornamental shape similar to edge 433 is formed on the back (see FIG. 27).

As a result, when the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced on the front side (flat surface side) of the storage surface portion 432, the displacement of the first arm 500 and the like is suppressed from being hindered, and the movement is smoothly performed. can be displaced. On the other hand, since the storage surface portion 432 is made of a light-transmitting material and the decorative shape is formed on the back surface thereof, the edge portion 433 and the decorative shape on the back surface of the storage surface portion 432 are integrated into a design, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. It is possible to secure the above-mentioned effect of making the user recognize the image without any problem.

In addition, when the front surface of the storage surface portion 432 is formed as a flat surface, the flat surface (front surface) is likely to be scratched due to sliding of the first arm 500 and the second arm 600. By forming the decorative shape on the front surface, the scratches on the front surface and the decorative shape on the back surface can be overlapped to make the scratches on the front surface inconspicuous.

Next, the structure of case member 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG. 27 is an exploded rear perspective view of the case member 400. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 27, the case member 400 includes a first base body 410 (see FIGS. 7 and 9) on which a first arm 500, a gear member 700, a reduction gear 800 and a drive motor 900 are arranged, A second base body 430 detachably connected to the first base body 410 is provided, and a housing surface portion 432 and an edge portion 433 of the second base body 430 are decorated. As a result, the case member 400 can be efficiently used for other models.

That is, along with a change in the displacement form (for example, displacement angle or displacement speed) of the first arm 500, the arrangement position of the arm shaft 520 of the first arm 500 may be changed, or the number of teeth of the reduction gear 800 or the pinion gear 920 may be changed. If it is necessary to change the arrangement position thereof in order to increase or decrease the (reduction ratio), the entire case member 400 can be is useless to change . Similarly, when it becomes necessary to change the decorative shape of the housing surface portion 432 and the edge portion 433, it is necessary to change the arrangement position of the arm shaft 520 of the first arm 500 and the arrangement position of the reduction gear 800 and the like. If there is not, it is useless to change the entire case member 400 .

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the case member 400 includes a first base body 410 in which members related to driving such as the first arm 500 and the drive motor 900 are arranged, and a housing surface portion 432, an edge portion 433 and the like. Since it is divided into two members, the second base body 430 and the second base body 430 on which parts related to decoration are arranged, only one of the first base body 410 or the second base body 430 is changed according to the contents of the change, and the first base body 410 is changed. Since the other of the body 410 or the second base body 430 can be used as it is, the case member 400 can be efficiently used for other models.

Here, since the other end of the second arm 600 is displaceably arranged on the second base body 430, when the other end of the second arm 600 is displaceably arranged on the first base body 410, , the distance between the arm axis 520 of the first arm 500 and the other end (the guide body 630) of the second arm 600 can be increased (separated). As a result, the displaceable amount of the first arm 500 can be increased, and the presentation effect by displacing the first arm 500 can be enhanced.

The relationship between the second arm 600 and the case member 400 (second base body 430) is sufficient if the other end of the second arm 600 is connected so as to be displaceable. (driving motor 900, reduction gear 800, gear member 700, etc.) is changed, or even if second arm 600 is changed in addition to this, second base body 430 can be used as it is, relatively easily. Therefore, by adopting the configuration in which the other end of the second arm 600 is connected to the second base body 430 instead of the first base body 410, the case member 400 can be efficiently used for other models. , and an increase in the amount of displacement of the first arm 500 can be achieved.

Next, the details of the connecting structure between the first base body 410 and the second base body 430 will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, the first base body 410 has a flat back surface, which is a region where the second base body 430 and the back plate member 450 are connected. A pair of first protrusions 416 and a pair of second protrusions 417 are provided.

The seat surface wall 415 is a part for forming the seat surface of the back plate member 450, and extends linearly in the vertical and horizontal directions as a ridge having a rectangular cross section. The inner wall surface of the portion extending in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 27) of the seat surface wall 415 functions as a portion for positioning the second base body 430 . That is, the distance from the inner wall surface of the longitudinally extending portion of the seat wall 415 to the first projection 416 is the same as the distance from one side surface (the left side surface in FIG. 27) of the projecting plate portion 434 to the positioning hole 434a. It is said that Therefore, by bringing the side surface of the projecting plate portion 434 into contact with the inner wall surface of the seat surface wall 415, both can be positioned in the lateral direction.

The height position of the protruding end face of the seat wall 415 is at the same height position as the protruding end faces of the first projection 416 and the second projection 417 (the seat projection 417a and the connecting wall 417c, see FIG. 28). are set (that is, the protruding tip surfaces of the respective portions 415 to 417 are arranged flush), and the front surface of the rear plate member 450 is seated on the protruding tip surfaces of the respective portions 415 to 417 .

The first protrusion 416 is a part for positioning the second base body 430 (projection plate portion 434) with respect to the first base body 410 and for forming the seat surface of the rear plate member 450. It is formed in a columnar shape, and a female screw (not shown) that can be tightened by a fastening screw (not shown) is recessed in the projecting tip surface of the columnar body. The second base body 430 is positioned with respect to the first base body 410 by inserting the pair of first projections 416 into the positioning holes 434 a of the projecting plate portion 434 . In this case, the thickness dimension of the projecting plate portion 434 is set to a dimension equal to or slightly smaller than the projecting height dimension of the first projection 416, so that the projecting end face of the first projection 416 also has a rear plate member. The front of the 450 is seated.

The second protrusions 417 are portions for positioning the back plate member 450 with respect to the first base body 410 and for forming the seating surface of the back plate member 450, and a pair of the second protrusions 417 are provided. Here, the second projection 417 will be described with reference to FIG. 28 .

28(a) is a partially enlarged rear view of the second protrusion 417, and FIG. 28(b) is a side view of the second protrusion 417 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXVIIIb in FIG. 28(a). c) is a cross-sectional view of the second projection 417 taken along line XXVIIIc-XXVIIIc of FIG. 28(a).

As shown in FIG. 28, the second projection 417 includes a bearing surface projection 417a formed in a cylindrical shape with a circular cross section, and a positioning projection 417b formed in a cylindrical shape with a circular cross section smaller in diameter than the bearing surface projection 417a. , and a connection wall 417c having a rectangular cross section that connects the outer peripheral surfaces of the bearing surface projection 417a and the positioning projection 417b.

The seat surface projection 417a and the connecting wall 417c are set to have the same projection height dimension, and the projection height dimension is set to be the same as the projection height dimension of the seat surface wall 415 and the first projection 416. be. That is, the second protrusion 417 has the front surface of the back plate member 450 seated on the protruding end surface of the seat surface protrusion 417a and the connecting wall 417c. A female screw (not shown) to which a fastening screw (not shown) can be fastened is recessed in the projecting tip surface of the bearing surface projection 417a.

The positioning projection 417 b has a projection height dimension larger than that of the seat surface projection 417 a and the connecting wall 417 c , and can be inserted into the positioning hole 452 of the back plate member 450 . The pair of positioning protrusions 417 b (see FIG. 27 ) are inserted into the positioning holes 452 of the rear plate member 450 to position the rear plate member 450 with respect to the first base body 410 .

The connecting wall 417c linearly connects the bearing surface projection 417a and the positioning projection 417b at the shortest distance. Here, while the bearing surface projection 417a and the positioning projection 417b have a relatively small diameter, the height of the projection is large. and vibration after installation, the bearing surface projection 417a and the positioning projection 417b are connected by the connecting wall 417c, thereby increasing the rigidity of the second projection 417 as a whole and preventing the damage. can be suppressed.

Further, by setting the projection height dimension of the connecting wall 417c to be the same as the projection height dimension of the seat surface projection 417a, the seat surface projection 417a and the positioning projection 417b are connected to the connection wall 417c to form the second In addition to the role of increasing the strength of the protrusion 417 as a whole, it can also serve as a seat surface on which the front surface of the back plate member 450 is seated. Therefore, the material cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the members for each role are provided separately.

Returning to FIG. 27, description will be made. A seat surface wall 425 , a first projection 426 and a second projection 427 are provided on the second base body 430 below the projecting plate portion 434 so as to protrude toward the back side. Note that the seat wall 425 is configured in the same manner as the seat wall 415 of the first base body 410 except that the arrangement position and extension length are different, and the first protrusion 426 and the second protrusion 427 are arranged in the same manner as the seat wall 415 . It is configured in the same manner as the first protrusion 416 and the second protrusion 417 of the first base body 410 except that the installation positions are different. Therefore, the description of the seat wall 425, the first protrusion 426 and the second protrusion 427 is omitted.

A projecting plate portion 434 projects from the second base body 430 toward the first base body 410 from the side surface (upper side surface in FIG. 27 ) that is connected to the first base body 410 . The protruding plate portion 434 is a portion that is superimposed on and connected to the back surface of the first base body 410, and is formed in a rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front. A pair of positioning holes 434a, which are circular holes when viewed from the front, are formed through the protruding plate portion 434 along the plate thickness direction. is projected.

The second base body 430 is positioned with respect to the first base body 410 by inserting the first protrusions 416 of the first base body 410 into the pair of positioning holes 434 a of the projecting plate portion 434 . In this case, the thickness dimension of the protruding plate portion 434 is set to a dimension equivalent to the protruding height dimension of the bearing surface wall 415 of the first base body 410, the first projection 416, and the like. The front side of the back plate member 450 is seated.

The rear surface of the protruding plate portion 434 has the same height position as the projecting tip surfaces of the seat surface wall 425, the first projection 426 and the second projection 427 (the seat surface projection 417a and the connecting wall 417c, see FIG. 28). It is set at a height position (that is, a height position where the rear surface of the protruding plate portion 434 and the protruding end surface of the seat surface wall 425 or the like are flush with each other). Therefore, the front surface of the back plate member 450 is seated on the back surface of the projecting portion 434 and the projecting tip surfaces of the portions 425-427.

The back plate member 450 is a member that is attached (fastened and fixed) to the back sides of the first base body 410 and the second base body 430 in order to connect the first base body 410 and the second base body 430 . , is formed in a plate shape from a metal material. Note that the rear plate member 450 has a square shape in a front view in a portion attached to the first base body 410 and a portion attached to the first base body 410 in a portion attached to the second base body 430 . Each is formed in an elongated rectangular shape with a narrower width than the .

Both sides of the back plate member 450 along the direction connecting the first base member 410 and the second base member 430 (vertical direction in FIG. 27) are bent toward the back side, thereby separating the first base member 410 and the second base member 430 from each other. The bending rigidity in the bending direction centering on the connecting portion (near the projecting plate portion 434) with 430 is enhanced. Thereby, the connection strength of the first base body 410 and the second base body 430 can be secured.

An insertion hole 451 and a positioning hole 452 are formed through the rear plate member 450 in the plate thickness direction. The insertion hole 451 is a circular cross-sectional hole through which a fastening screw (not shown) can be inserted and has an inner diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the protruding tip surfaces of the first projections 416 and 426, and corresponds to the first projections 416 and 426. formed in each position. The positioning holes 452 are holes having a circular cross-section with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameters of the positioning protrusions 417b and 434b, and are formed at positions corresponding to the positioning protrusions 417b and 434b, respectively.

To assemble the case member 400 formed as described above, first, the projecting plate portion 434 of the second base body 430 is superimposed on the lower portion (flat surface portion) of the back surface of the first base body 410 . In this case, as described above, the projecting plate portion 434 of the second base body 430 is attached to the inner wall surface of the portion of the seat wall 415 of the first base body 410 that extends in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 27). By abutting one side surface (the left side surface in FIG. 27), both can be laterally positioned. This allows the first protrusion 416 to be easily inserted into the positioning hole 434a.

Next, the rear plate member 450 is overlaid on the rear surfaces of the first base body 410 and the second base body 430 and fastened and fixed with fastening screws (not shown). That is, a plurality of (two in this embodiment) positioning projections 417b on the first base body 410 side and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) positioning projections 417b and 434b on the second base body 430 side are positioned. By inserting each through the hole 452 , the positions of the first protrusions 416 , 426 and the second protrusions 417 , 427 and the insertion hole 451 are matched. , 426 and the second projections 417, 427, respectively. As a result, the rear plate member 450 is fastened and fixed to the rear surfaces of the first base body 410 and the second base body 430, and the assembly of the case member 400 is completed.

In this way, the case member 400 is connected by the metal back plate member 450 to which the first base member 410 and the second base member 430 are attached on the back side thereof. By making the connection of the two base bodies 430 strong, the rigidity of the case member 400 as a whole can be ensured.

In this assembled state, the projecting plate portion 434 formed on the second base member 430 is sandwiched between the rear surface of the first base member 410 and the front surface of the rear plate member 450, so that the case member 400 is shaped like a plate. By utilizing the overlap of bodies, the rigidity of the case member 400 as a whole can be effectively increased while achieving simplification and miniaturization of the structure.

The back plate member 450 is attached to the first base body 410 (square-shaped part in front view), and fastening screws are fastened to the four corners of the square, and the back plate member 450 is attached to the second base body 430 . Since fastening screws are fastened to both ends in the longitudinal direction of the portion (the elongated portion that extends vertically), the rigidity of the back plate member 450 is efficiently utilized, and the case member 400 (the first The rigidity of the base body 410 and the second base body 430) can be increased.

Note that the case member 400 is assembled by first attaching (fastening and fixing) the rear plate member 450 to the rear surface of the second base body 430, and then fastening and fixing the second base body 430 and the rear plate member 450 together. 1 It may be attached (fastened and fixed) to the base body 410 .

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 29(a) and 29(b). FIG. 29(a) is a front view of the shaft body 2542 and the retaining ring 2534 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 29(b) shows the shaft body 2542 and the retaining ring 2534 along line XXIXb-XXIXb of FIG. 29(a). is a cross-sectional view of.

In the first embodiment, the arc-shaped protruding tip of the protruding portion 534c of the retaining ring 534 presses (closely contacts) the bottom surface of the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft 542, so that the retaining ring 534 is attached to the shaft 542. In the second embodiment, the shaft body 2542 is formed with an engaged portion 2542d that engages with the retaining ring 2534 in the circumferential direction. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the part same as 1st Embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 29(a) and 29(b), the shaft body 2542 has an engaged portion 2542d recessed in the bottom surface of the circumferential groove 542c. The engaged portion 2542d is a concave portion for receiving the overhanging portion 2534c of the retaining ring 2534, and is positioned 180 degrees out of phase with the flat surface 542a (that is, the flat surfaces 533a and 533e1 of the wheel gear 533 are provided with the shaft body 2542d). When the flat surface 542a of 542 is engaged (see FIG. 15(a)), it is recessed at a position opposite to the protrusion 533e (lower side in FIG. 29(b)).

The retaining ring 2534 includes projecting portions 534c, 2534c that project radially inward from three circumferential locations on the inner peripheral side of the annular portion 534b. In this embodiment, the protruding portion 2534c located on the side that is 180 degrees out of phase with the opening end 534a (that is, positioned between the pair of protruding portions 534c located on the side of the opening end 534a) The inward projection dimension is set to be larger than the radially inward projection dimension of the projecting portion 534c located on the open end 534a side.

According to this embodiment, when the retaining ring 2534 is fitted into the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 2542 to the appropriate position, as shown in FIG. can be received in the engaged portion 2542d. That is, the shaft body 2542 is stopped by engaging the one projecting portion 2534c of the retaining ring 2534 with the engaged portion 2542d formed as a concave portion in the bottom surface of the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 2542. The wheels 2534 can be circumferentially engaged.

As a result, the circumferential movement of the snap ring 2534 relative to the shaft 2542 can be restricted, so that the snap ring 2534 can be reliably rotated together with the shaft 2542 . That is, since it is possible to prevent the retaining ring 2534 from slipping on the shaft 2542 in the circumferential direction, even a large rotational torque can be reliably transferred from the shaft 2542 to the protrusion 533e via the retaining ring 2534. can be transmitted.

As a result, the rotational torque transmitted between the wheel gear 533 and the shaft 2542 is received not only between the flat surfaces 533a, 533e1 of the wheel gear 533 and the flat surface 542a of the shaft 2542, but the wheel It can also be supported between the protrusion 533 of the gear 533 and the open end 534a of the retaining ring 2534 (see FIG. 15(b)). As a result, the rotational torque can be distributed, and the durability of the shaft 2542 and the wheel gear 533 can be improved accordingly.

In this case, the engaged portion 2542d of the shaft 2542 is arranged at a position 180 degrees out of phase with the flat surface 542a. When the flat surface 542a of the shaft 542 is engaged with 533a and 533e1 (see FIG. 15A), the engaged portion 2542d is arranged at a position 180 degrees out of phase with the projecting portion 533e (that is, , the opening of the engaged portion 2542d faces the side opposite to the protrusion 533e).

Therefore, the fitting direction of the retaining ring 2534 for positioning the projection 533e between the opening end 534a of the retaining ring 2534 (see FIGS. 15(a) and 15(b)) and the projecting portion 2534c of the retaining ring 2534 can be aligned with the fitting direction of the snap ring 2534 for engaging (accepting) the engaged portion 2542 d of the shaft 2542 . As a result, the projecting portion 533e and the snap ring 2534 are locked by the respective arms of the needle nose pliers, and only by fitting the snap ring 2534 into the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 2542, the snap ring 2534 protrudes. The portion 2534c can be easily and reliably engaged with the engaged portion 2542d of the shaft 2542 .

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 29(c) and 29(d). FIG. 29(c) is a front view of the shaft body 3542 and the retaining ring 3534 in the third embodiment, and FIG. is a cross-sectional view of.

In the second embodiment, the engaged portion 2542d is formed as a concave portion, but in the third embodiment, the engaged portion 3542d is formed as a flat surface. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 29(c) and 29(d), the shaft body 3542 is formed with an engaged portion 3542d on the bottom surface of the circumferential groove 542c. The engaged portion 3542d is formed as a flat surface parallel to the flat surface 542a and is positioned 180 degrees out of phase with the flat surface 542a (that is, the flat surfaces 533a and 533e1 of the wheel gear 533 are connected to the shaft 542). When the flat surface 542a of is engaged (see FIG. 15(a)), it is formed on the opposite side of the protrusion 533e (lower side in FIG. 29(d)).

The retaining ring 3534 includes protruding portions 534c, 3534c that protrude radially inward from three circumferential locations on the inner peripheral side of the annular portion 534b. In this embodiment, the protruding portion 3534c located on the side that is 180 degrees out of phase with the opening end 534a (that is, positioned between the pair of protruding portions 534c located on the side of the opening end 534a) The inward projection dimension is set to be larger than the radial inward projection dimension of the projecting portion 534c located on the side of the opening end 534a, and the projecting tip extends in the axial direction (FIG. 29(d) paper surface). vertical).

According to this embodiment, as in the case of the second embodiment, the engaging portion 3542d of the shaft body 3542 and the overhanging portion 3534c of the retaining ring 3534 are engaged with each other so that the retaining ring 3534 is engaged with the shaft body 3542. can be circumferentially engaged. This prevents the snap ring 3534 from slipping on the shaft 3542 in the circumferential direction, and even a large rotational torque is transferred from the shaft 3542 through the snap ring 334 to the protrusion 533e (Fig. 15(b)). As a result, the rotational torque is applied not only between the flat surfaces 533a, 533e1 of the wheel gear 533 and the flat surface 542a of the shaft body 3542, but also between the protrusion 533 of the wheel gear 533 and the open end 534a of the retaining ring 3534. Since it can take charge, the rotational torque can be distributed, and the durability of the shaft body 3542 and the wheel gear 533 can be improved accordingly.

In addition, since the engaged portion 3542d of the shaft 3542 is disposed at a position 180 degrees out of phase with the flat surface 542a, the projection 533e and the snap ring 3534 are connected as in the case of the second embodiment. are engaged with the respective arms of the needle nose pliers, and the overhanging portion 2534c of the retaining ring 3534 is engaged with the engaged portion of the shaft 3542 simply by fitting the retaining ring 3534 into the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft 3542. 3542d can be easily and reliably engaged.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured by omitting a part of the configuration in each embodiment, or a part of the configuration in each embodiment may be replaced with one in another embodiment or modification. The pachinko machine 10 may be configured by combining with or replacing the configuration of the units.

In each of the above embodiments, the guide groove 511a is formed in the body member 510 of the first arm 500, and the protruding pin 730 inserted into the guide groove 511a protrudes from the gear member 700. However, this is not necessarily the case. Alternatively, a projecting pin may be projected from the body member 510 of the first arm 500 and a guide groove 511a through which the projecting pin is inserted may be formed in the gear member 700 .

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

A game machine comprising an arm member that is displaced about an arm axis and a driving means that generates a driving force for displacing the arm member about the arm axis, wherein the driving force is applied from the driving means. a gear member that rotates around a gear shaft by means of a gear member; the gear member includes a protruding pin that protrudes at a position that is eccentric with respect to the gear shaft; A guide groove for receiving a setting pin is provided, and when the gear member is rotated in the first direction and the projecting pin is moved along the guide groove, the arm member is arranged at the first position and the projecting pin is moved. An angle between a straight line connecting the axial center of the setting pin and the arm axis and a straight line connecting the axial center of the projecting pin and the gear axis increases as the arm member approaches the first position from a predetermined position. Gaming machine A1.

According to the gaming machine A1, as the arm member approaches the first position from the predetermined position, the angle formed between the straight line connecting the axis of the projecting pin and the arm axis and the line connecting the axis of the projecting pin and the gear axis. becomes larger. Therefore, when an external force acts on the arm member and the external force is transmitted to the gear member, the closer the arm member is to the first position, the more the direction of the force generated in the gear member to rotate the gear member. A force component (that is, a force component in a direction orthogonal to a straight line connecting the axial center of the projecting pin and the gear shaft) can be reduced. As a result, when the arm member is held at the first position, the driving force required for the driving means to counteract the external force (for example, gravity) acting on the arm member can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the capacity of the means and suppress the energy consumption.

Further, when starting to displace the arm member held at the first position, the load on the driving means increases due to the influence of inertia force and frictional force. Since the angle between the straight line connecting the axial center of the mounting pin and the arm shaft and the straight line connecting the axial center of the projecting pin and the gear shaft is large (that is, the reduction ratio is large), the arm member can be moved from the first position. By reducing the load on the driving means when starting the displacement, the capacity of the driving means can be reduced. On the other hand, when the arm member reaches the first position, even if the rotation speed of the gear member is constant, the displacement speed of the arm member can be reduced. can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1, the gear member is rotated in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and the protruding pin is moved along the guide groove, whereby the arm member is arranged at the second position. The angle between the straight line connecting the axis of the projecting pin and the arm axis and the line connecting the axis of the projecting pin and the gear axis changes as the arm member approaches the second position from the predetermined position. A gaming machine A2 characterized by being enlarged.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, as the arm member approaches the second position from the predetermined position, the straight line connecting the axial center of the projecting pin and the arm axis and the axial center of the projecting pin and Since the angle formed with the straight line connecting the gear shafts becomes large, the same effect as the game machine A1 is exhibited. That is, when the arm member is held at the second position, the driving force required for the driving means to counteract the external force (for example, gravity) acting on the arm member can be reduced, and the driving means can be reduced accordingly. It is possible to reduce capacity and reduce energy consumption.

Further, when starting to displace the arm member from the second position, the load on the driving means can be reduced, and the capacity can be reduced. , the impact at the time of arrival can be suppressed, and the durability can be improved.

In the game machines A1 and A2, the angle between the straight line connecting the axial center of the projecting pin and the arm axis and the straight line connecting the axial center of the projecting pin and the gear axis is such that the arm member moves from the predetermined position to the first position. The "predetermined position" when it becomes larger as it approaches , means a position where the arm axis, the axial center of the projecting pin, and the gear axis are arranged on one straight line.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the arm member can be displaced to the first position by rotation of the gear member in the first direction, and the guide groove of the arm member allows the arm member to move to the first position. A gaming machine A3 is characterized in that a region is formed in which the gear member rotates further in the first direction and the protruding pin of the gear member moves when the gear member is arranged in the state of A3.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1 or A2, the guide groove of the arm member is arranged in the first position and the gear member rotates in the first direction. Since the area for the movement of the projecting pin is formed, the gear member is further rotated in the first direction from the state in which the arm member is arranged at the first position, and the projecting pin moves along the guide groove. By moving with the arm member, the gap between the arm shaft and its bearing or the gap between the protruding pin and the guide groove can be absorbed, and the arm member can be pressed toward the first position. As a result, the arm member can be suppressed from rattling at the first position, and as a result, the arm member can be firmly held at the first position.

In the gaming machine A3, after the arm member is arranged at the first position, the gear member connects the axis of the projecting pin and the gear shaft with a straight line connecting the axis of the projecting pin and the arm axis. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that it is rotated to a position perpendicular to a straight line.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3, after the arm member is arranged at the first position, the gear member is configured to move the straight line connecting the axial center of the projecting pin and the arm axis and the position of the projecting pin. Since the arm member is rotated to a position where the straight line connecting the shaft center and the gear shaft is orthogonal, even if an external force acts on the arm member, the force component in the direction to rotate the gear member (i.e., the shaft center of the projecting pin and the gear) A force component in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the axes) is not generated, and the rotation of the gear member can be restricted. As a result, since the arm member can be mechanically maintained at the first position, the driving force of the driving means can be reduced (or released). As a result, the capacity of the driving means can be reduced and the energy consumption can be suppressed.

A game machine A5, wherein the guide groove of the arm member extends linearly in the game machine A3 or A4.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3 or A4, the guide groove of the arm member extends linearly. When further rotated in the direction, the protruding pin of the gear member can be gradually pushed against the inner wall surface of the guide groove of the arm member. That is, the gap between the arm shaft and its bearing or the gap between the projecting pin and the guide groove can be absorbed, and the arm member can be gradually pressed toward the first position.

Any one of the game machines A1 to A5, comprising a case member in which the arm member and the gear shaft are arranged, and rotational position detection means arranged in the case member for detecting the rotational position of the gear member, The gear member includes a gear body arranged in the case member so as to be rotatable about the gear shaft and having teeth formed on an outer peripheral surface thereof, and a gear body projecting radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the gear body. and a detected portion detected by the rotational position detection means, wherein the case member is erected from the case member toward the detected portion and extends along the movement locus of the detected portion. A gaming machine A6 characterized by comprising a regulating rib provided.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, the inclination of the gear member can be effectively suppressed. That is, when the projecting pin of the gear member is moved along the guide groove of the arm member, the gear member is tilted due to the action of reaction force on the projecting pin that presses the inner wall surface of the guide groove. . In this case, according to the gaming machine A6, the case member has a regulating rib erected toward the detected portion of the gear member and extending along the movement locus of the detected portion. When the tilts, the portion to be detected can be received by the restricting ribs. As a result, excessive inclination of the gear member can be avoided while suppressing an increase in rotational resistance of the gear member, and damage to the gear shaft and tooth surface can be suppressed.

In particular, the portion to be detected is a portion that protrudes radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the gear body, and is a portion that undergoes maximum displacement when the gear member is tilted. , the excessive inclination of the gear member can be effectively suppressed. Furthermore, as described above, the portion to be detected, which is the portion detected by the rotational position detecting means, also serves as a stopper function for suppressing the inclination of the gear shaft. The structure can be simplified and the parts cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the parts are separately provided.

A gaming machine A7, wherein a gap is formed between a standing tip of the regulating rib and a bottom face of the detected portion facing the case member in the gaming machine A6.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of the game machine A6, since a gap is formed between the upright tip of the regulating rib and the bottom face of the detected portion facing the case member, the inside of the guide groove When the action of the reaction force on the protruding pin that presses the wall surface is small, the gap between the bottom surface of the detected portion and the upright tip of the regulating rib can be maintained to avoid the occurrence of contact resistance. . As a result, the driving force required to rotate the gear member can be reduced.

A gaming machine A8 in the gaming machine A6 or A7, wherein the detected part is formed by curving an edge of a bottom surface facing the case member in an arc shape.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of the game machine A6 or A7, the detected part is formed by curving the edge of the bottom face facing the case member in an arc shape, so that the inclination of the gear member causes the detected part to be detected. Thus, when the bottom surface of the detected portion is brought into contact with the regulating rib, it is possible to prevent the edge of the bottom surface of the detected portion from being caught by the regulating rib. Therefore, the gear member can be rotated smoothly.

A game machine A9 in any one of the game machines A6 to A8, wherein the projecting pin of the gear member is erected from the detected portion.

According to the game machine A9, in any one of the game machines A6 to A8, the gear member has the protruding pin erected from the detected part, so that the gear member rotates and the protruding pin moves into the guide groove of the arm member. When the protruding pin receives a reaction force from the inner wall surface of the guide groove, only the detected portion projecting radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the gear body is partially tilted This makes it easier to suppress the inclination of the gear body (gear shaft). As a result, excessive rotation resistance and wear of the tooth flanks due to rotation in a state in which the tooth flanks of the gear body and the tooth flanks of the mating member meshing with the gear body are deviated from each other can be suppressed.

A game machine A10 in the game machine A9, wherein the restricting rib of the case member is positioned radially outward from the base portion of the projecting pin when viewed in the axial direction of the gear shaft of the gear member.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effects of the game machine A9, the regulating rib of the case member is positioned radially outward from the base of the projecting pin when viewed in the axial direction of the gear shaft of the gear member. When the protruding pin receives a reaction force from the inner wall surface of the guide groove, the overhanging tip side of the detected portion (that is, the portion closest to the case member) can be received by the regulating rib, and the tilt of the gear member is prevented. can be effectively suppressed.

A game machine A11 in any one of the game machines A6 to A10, wherein the regulating rib of the case member extends to a rotational position where the detected portion of the gear member is detected by the rotational position detection means. .

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A6 to A10, the regulating rib of the case member extends to the rotational position where the detected portion of the gear member is detected by the rotational position detection means. Therefore, when the gear member is rotated while the protruding pin receives a reaction force from the inner wall surface of the guide groove, it is possible to prevent the detected portion from colliding with the rotational position detecting means. As a result, it is possible to improve the reliability of detection of the rotational position of the gear member.

A D-shaped cross section formed by making a part of the outer surface of the cylindrical shaft-shaped body flat and having a D-shaped cross section, and a circumferential groove recessed in the outer surface of the D-shaped cross section along the circumferential direction. and an insertion hole formed with a D-shaped cross section by making a part of the inner surface of the circular hole flat so that the D-shaped cross section of the shaft can be inserted, The flat surface of the insertion hole and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section are engaged to prevent the rotating body that rotates together with the shaft and the shaft from slipping out of the insertion hole of the rotating body in the axial direction. and a driving means for imparting a rotational driving force to the shaft or the rotating body, wherein the rotating body extends from its axial end surface toward the shaft. A gaming machine B1 characterized by comprising a protrusion protruding along the line.

According to the gaming machine B1, the D-shaped cross section of the shaft is inserted through the insertion hole of the rotating body, and the retaining ring is fitted in the circumferential groove of the D-shaped end face of the shaft protruding from the axial end face of the rotating body. By being fitted, the shaft is prevented from slipping out in the axial direction from the insertion hole of the rotating body. In this case, the axial end face of the rotating body has a projection along the shaft. A tool such as pliers can be used to lock and work. That is, there is no need to lock the shaft with a tool. Therefore, the retaining ring can be fitted into the circumferential groove of the shaft without damaging the shaft. This is particularly effective when the shaft is made of brass, since it is easily damaged. Examples of damage to the shaft include damage to the surface of the shaft and bending of the axis of the shaft.

In the game machine B1, the game machine B2 is characterized in that the protrusion is positioned between the opposing open ends of a retaining ring fitted in the circumferential groove of the shaft.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, it is possible to prevent the retaining ring from falling out of the circumferential groove of the shaft.

That is, there is a relative rotation position between the shaft and the retaining ring where the engagement between the two is easily released, and when the relative rotation position is reached, the shaft is pulled out of the insertion hole of the rotating body. When a load is applied to the shaft, the retaining ring may fall out of the circumferential groove of the shaft.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B2, since the protrusion is positioned between the opposed opening ends of the retaining ring fitted in the circumferential groove of the shaft, the opening end of the retaining ring is brought into contact with the protrusion. , the retaining ring can be restricted from rotating relative to the shaft. Therefore, by setting the position of the protrusion at an appropriate position, the relative rotational position between the shaft and the retaining ring is maintained at an appropriate position, and the retaining ring is prevented from falling out of the circumferential groove of the shaft. can.

A gaming machine B3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine B2, it comprises engaging means for engaging a retaining ring with the circumferential groove of the shaft.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, it is possible to improve the durability of the shaft and the rotating body.

That is, in a structure in which the rotational torque transmitted between the rotating body and the shaft is borne by the flat surface of the insertion hole of the rotating body and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section of the shaft, these flat surfaces have a large load, It causes deterioration of durability.

On the other hand, since the game machine B3 is provided with engaging means for engaging the retaining ring with the circumferential groove of the shaft, the retaining ring is rotated together with the shaft through the engagement by the engaging means. be able to. As a result, the rotational torque transmitted between the rotating body and the shaft is transferred not only to the flat surface of the insertion hole in the rotating body and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section of the shaft, but also to the protrusions and stops of the rotating body. It can also serve between the open ends of the ring. As a result, the rotational torque can be distributed, and the durability of the shaft and the rotating body can be improved accordingly.

In addition, in order to increase the engagement area between the flat surfaces and improve durability, the shaft and the rotating body must be enlarged and weighted. Since the retaining ring, which serves as a stop, also has a role of bearing the rotational torque, it is possible to reduce the size and weight.

In the game machine B3, the retaining ring has an annular portion formed by cutting a part of the annular shape to form an open end, and radially inward from a plurality of locations on the inner peripheral side of the annular portion in the circumferential direction. The engaging means is formed in the engaged portion formed as a flat surface or a recess on the bottom surface of the circumferential groove of the shaft body. A gaming machine B4 characterized by engaging at least one projecting portion of a retaining ring.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3, the retaining ring is formed as an E-shaped retaining ring having a plurality of overhanging portions formed on the inner peripheral side of the annular portion, and the engaging means is At least one protruding portion of the retaining ring is engaged with the engaged portion formed as a flat surface or a recess in the bottom surface of the circumferential groove of the shaft. can be firmly engaged. That is, since the rotational torque can be reliably received by the engagement between the projecting portion and the engaged portion, the durability of the shaft and the rotating body can be improved, and the transmittable rotational torque can be increased. can. In addition, since a general-purpose part (E-type retaining ring) can be used as the retaining ring, the cost of parts can be reduced.

In addition, since the engaged portion is formed as a flat surface or a concave portion on the bottom surface of the circumferential groove, the engagement between the circumferential groove and the snap ring of the shaft body can be achieved, and the size and weight of the shaft can be reduced. can be improved.

In the gaming machine B4, the engaged portion formed on the bottom surface of the circumferential groove of the shaft body is in a state in which the flat surface of the insertion hole and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section are engaged with the projection. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being positioned with a phase difference of 180 degrees.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4, the engaged portion formed on the bottom surface of the circumferential groove of the shaft engages the flat surface of the insertion hole and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section. In this state, the projecting portion is positioned 180 degrees out of phase with the projecting portion, so that the work of engaging the projecting portion of the retaining ring and the engaged portion of the shaft can be performed easily and reliably. That is, when the D-shaped cross section of the shaft is inserted into the insertion hole of the rotating body, and the D-shaped end face of the shaft protrudes from the axial end face of the rotating body, the opposite side of the protrusion (180 degrees out of phase) Since the engaged portion is located on the opposite side), the engaging direction of the retaining ring for positioning the protrusion between the open ends of the retaining ring and the projecting portion of the retaining ring are aligned with the engaged portion of the shaft. It is possible to match the fitting direction of the snap ring for engaging with the part. Therefore, by simply fitting the retaining ring into the circumferential groove of the shaft while engaging the protrusion and the retaining ring with a tool such as pliers, the projecting portion of the retaining ring can be engaged with the shaft. The joint can be easily and reliably engaged.

A game machine B6 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines B1 to B5, the protrusion is formed at a position that is in phase with a flat surface in the insertion hole of the rotating body.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B5, the protrusion is formed at a position that is in the same phase as the flat surface in the insertion hole of the rotating body, so durability is improved. can be planned. That is, the portion of the rotating body where the flat surface is formed in the insertion hole is the thickest (thickest in the radial direction) and is a portion where the strength is ensured. Therefore, by forming the projection at a portion of the insertion hole that is in the same phase as the flat surface, the load acting from the projection can be received at the portion where the strength is ensured, and the rotating body Durability can be improved. In addition, if the position of the insertion hole is in the same phase as the flat surface, the cross-sectional area of the protrusion can be increased, so that the strength can be secured and the durability of the protrusion itself can be improved. can be planned.

In the game machine B6, the projection has a flat surface located on the side facing the shaft and formed continuously with the flat surface of the insertion hole, and the flat surface of the insertion hole and the flat surface of the projection , a game machine B7 characterized in that it can be engaged with a flat surface of a D-shaped cross section of the shaft.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B6, the protrusion has a flat surface located on the side facing the shaft body and formed continuously with the flat surface of the insertion hole. And since the flat surface of the protrusion can be engaged with the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section of the shaft, the engagement area between the flat surfaces can be increased by the amount of the flat surface formed on the protrusion. . As a result, the rotational torque can be distributed, and the durability of the shaft and the rotating body can be improved accordingly.

In addition, the flat surface of the D-shaped section of the shaft is engaged with the protrusion that abuts the open end of the retaining ring and serves to suppress the relative rotation of the retaining ring with respect to the shaft. In addition, by making it also play the role of bearing the rotational torque, it is possible to improve the durability of the shaft and the rotating body, and to reduce the size and weight.

According to any one of game machines B3 to B7, an arm member that is displaced around an arm shaft, and a decorative member that is rotatably disposed on the arm member and functions as a decorative body, the shaft body, A game machine B8 characterized in that a rotating body, a snap ring and a driving means are arranged on the arm member for rotating the decorative member.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B3 to B7, the durability of the mechanism for rotating the decorative member is improved while suppressing the displacement of the arm member from being hindered. be able to. That is, since the decorative member is large and heavy in order to function as a decorative body, the mechanism for rotating the decorative member is required to be durable enough to withstand a large rotational torque. is displaced around the center, it is required to suppress the inertial force by reducing the weight. In this case, by adopting the above-described shaft body, rotating body, retaining ring, and driving means as a mechanism for rotating the decorative member, it is possible to reduce the size and weight while ensuring the durability to receive a large rotational torque. Displacement of the arm member can be performed smoothly.

A game machine comprising a case member, an arm member displaceably disposed on the case member, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the arm member to displace the arm member with respect to the case member, a second rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member; and a connecting member having one end pivotally supported by the second rotating member and having the other end displaceably connected to the case member. A gaming machine C1 characterized by:

According to the game machine C1, the arm member is displaced with respect to the case member by applying the driving force from the driving means. In this case, one end of the connecting member is pivotally supported by the second rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member, and the other end of the connecting member is connected to the case member so as to be displaceable. When the arm member and the connecting member are displaced with respect to the case member, the angle between the arm member and the connecting member (a straight line connecting the connecting position where one end of the connecting member angle formed by a straight line connecting a connection position where one end of the connection member is connected and a connection position where the other end of the connection member is connected to the case member), the second rotating member is moved relative to the arm member. It can be displaced (rotated). That is, since the driving means for applying the driving force to the arm member can also serve as the means for rotating the second rotating member, the driving means for rotating the second rotating member can be eliminated.

In the gaming machine C1, a first rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member, and driving means for applying a driving force to the first rotating member to rotate the first rotating member with respect to the arm member. A gaming machine C2 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, a driving force is applied to the first rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member to rotate the first rotating member with respect to the arm member. Since the drive means is provided, the arm member is displaced by the drive force applied from the drive means, and the second rotating member is rotated in accordance with the displacement of the arm member. can rotate the first rotating member. In other words, it is not necessary to provide driving means (three in total) for each of the arm member, the second rotating member and the first rotating member, and the arm member, the second rotating member and the first rotating member can be driven by two driving means. can do.

A gaming machine C3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine C2, the second rotating member and the first rotating member are arranged coaxially.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, since the second rotating member and the first rotating member are arranged coaxially, both the second rotating member and the first rotating member are arm members. It is possible to enhance the presentation effect in the case of being rotated simultaneously with the displacement of .

A gaming machine C4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine C3, the second rotating member is arranged on the back side of the first rotating member.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3, the second rotating member is disposed on the back side of the first rotating member (that is, the game board side), so that during the displacement of the arm member, It is possible to prevent the trajectory of the connecting member from overlapping the first rotating member and hiding part of the first rotating member behind the connecting member. That is, the entire first rotary member can be exposed during displacement of the arm member.

A gaming machine C5, wherein in any one of the gaming machines C2 to C4, the second rotating member and the first rotating member rotate in the same direction.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C2 to C4, the second rotating member and the first rotating member rotate in the same direction, so that the second rotating member rotates according to the displacement of the arm member. When the member and the first rotating member are rotated at the same time, it is possible to give the player the impression that both rotate smoothly, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

A gaming machine C6 characterized in that, in the gaming machine C5, the second rotating member and the first rotating member are arranged coaxially and have different rotation speeds.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C5, the second rotating member and the first rotating member are arranged coaxially and have different rotation speeds, so that the two members (the second rotating member and the first rotating member) can be rotated in the same rotational direction at different rotational speeds while being displaced on the same trajectory along the displacement direction of the arm member. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of giving the player the impression that the two members (the second rotating member and the first rotating member) rotate smoothly.

In any one of game machines C1 to C6, the case member has a guide groove extending in a groove shape, and the other end of the connecting member is slidably connected to the case member via the guide groove. A gaming machine C7 characterized by:

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C6, the connection member is slidably connected to the case member through the guide groove of the case member. The displaceable amount of the arm member can be increased compared to a form in which the other end of the arm member is pivotally supported by the case member. In this case, if the displaceable amount of the arm member is increased, the rotatable amount of the second rotating member can also be increased. Therefore, when the arm member is displaced, it is possible to enhance not only the presentation effect by the displacement of the arm member itself, but also the presentation effect by the rotation of the second rotating member accompanying the displacement.

In any one of game machines C1 to C7, a liquid crystal display device is provided, and the arm member is positioned between a first position above the display area of the liquid crystal display device and a second position outside the display region of the liquid crystal display device. The case member has an edge portion formed along the outer edge of the display area of the liquid crystal display device and positioned on the displacement trajectory of the arm member, the edge portion forming a circular cross-section. A gaming machine C8 characterized by being curved in an arc.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C7, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the arm member from being hindered by the edge of the case member while ensuring the display area of the liquid crystal device.

That is, in the configuration in which the arm member is displaced between the first position and the second position about the arm axis, the overall length of the arm member is increased, so that the arm member is moved forward and backward (in a direction perpendicular to the game board) when the arm member is displaced. vibration is likely to occur. Therefore, when the arm member is displaced from the first position to the second position, the arm member may collide with the edge of the case member, causing damage, or the arm member may be locked by the edge of the case member and cannot be displaced. may disappear. On the other hand, it is conceivable to prevent the edge of the case member from being positioned on the displacement trajectory of the arm member. Since it is hidden by the member, it cannot be done. Retracting the edge of the case member out of the displacement trajectory of the arm member exposes the wiring and the substrate arranged on the back side and spoils the appearance. I can't.

In this case, according to the gaming machine C8, the edge formed along the outer edge of the display area of the liquid crystal display device and positioned on the displacement trajectory of the arm member is curved in an arcuate cross-section. Assume that the arm member swayed backward collides with the edge of the case member when the arm member is displaced from the first position to the second position while securing an opening for exposing the display area of the liquid crystal device in the case member. Also, the arm member can be guided by the curvature of the arcuate cross section to absorb the impact. Therefore, damage can be suppressed, and the arm member can be smoothly displaced by suppressing the arm member from being locked and stopped by the edge of the case member.

A game machine C9, wherein in the game machine C8, the case member has a decorative shape formed adjacent to the edge.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effects of the game machine C8, the case member is formed with a decorative shape adjacent to the edge of the case member, so that the edge is curved in an arcuate cross section. Even in such a case, it is possible to allow the player to recognize the edge part and the decorative shape as an integrated design without any sense of incongruity, and to prevent the edge part from being unnaturally conspicuous.

The term "decorative shape" means a shape formed on the front or back surface of the case member. A combination etc. are illustrated. The grooves or striations may be straight or curved, or a combination thereof. The same applies to the gaming machine C11.

In the game machine C9, the arm member displaces the front side of the case member, and the case member is made of a light-transmitting material, has a flat front surface, and has a decorative shape. A game machine C10 characterized in that it is formed on the back surface.

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effects of the game machine C9, since the front surface of the case member in which the arm member is displaced is formed as a flat surface, the movement of the arm member is suppressed from being hindered and is smoothly displaced. can be made On the other hand, since the case member is made of a light-transmitting material and the ornamental shape is formed on the back surface, it is possible to ensure the effect that the player recognizes the edge portion and the ornamental shape as an integrated design without any sense of incongruity. Further, when the front surface of the case member is formed as a flat surface, scratches are likely to be formed due to the sliding of the arm members. can be done.

A game machine comprising a case member, an arm member displaceably disposed on the case member, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the arm member to displace the arm member with respect to the case member, The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the case member includes a first case portion in which the arm member is arranged, and a second case portion detachably connected to the first case portion.

According to the gaming machine D1, the case member includes the first case portion in which the arm member is arranged, and the second case portion detachably connected to the first case portion, so that it can be applied to other models. It is possible to efficiently use the case member.

That is, for example, when changing the arrangement position of the arm member in accordance with the change of the displacement mode of the arm member, it is useless to change the entire case member when there is no need to change other parts. Similarly, when changing other parts, it is useless to change the entire case member when there is no need to change the arrangement position of the arm member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the case member is divided into the first case portion in which the arm member is arranged and the second case portion detachably connected to the first case portion. Only one of the first case part and the second case part needs to be changed according to the contents of the change, and the other of the first case part and the second case part can be used. can be efficiently diverted.

In the game machine D1, the game machine D2 is characterized in that the case member has a decorative shape formed on the second case portion.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the case member has a decorative shape formed in the second case portion, so that the case member can be efficiently diverted to other models. .

That is, it is useless to change the entire case member when changing the arrangement position of the arm member in accordance with the change of the displacement mode of the arm member, although it is not necessary to change the decorative shape. Similarly, when changing the decorative shape, it is useless to change the entire case member when there is no need to change the arrangement position of the arm member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, the case member is divided into the first case portion in which the arm member is arranged and the second case portion in which the decorative shape is formed. Only one of the first case part and the second case part needs to be changed, and the other of the first case part and the second case part can be diverted, so that the case member can be efficiently used for other models. It can be carried out.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the case member includes a metal back plate member attached to the back sides of the first case portion and the second case portion, A gaming machine D3, characterized in that one side of the game machine D3 is provided with a protruding plate portion that protrudes outward and is sandwiched between the other of the first case portion or the second case portion and the back plate member.

According to the game machine D3, in the game machine D1 or D2, the case members are connected by the metal back plate member to which the first case portion and the second case portion are attached on the back side thereof. The connection between the first case portion and the second case portion is made strong, and the rigidity of the case member as a whole can be ensured. Further, one of the first case portion and the second case portion has a projecting plate portion projecting outward, and the projecting plate portion is connected to the other of the first case portion or the second case portion and the back plate member. Therefore, by utilizing the overlap of the plate-like bodies, it is possible to effectively increase the rigidity of the case as a whole while achieving simplification and miniaturization of the structure.

In the game machine D3, the game machine D4 is characterized in that a positioning wall positioned along the outline of the projecting plate is formed on the other back surface of the first case or the second case.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, the other rear surface of the first case portion or the second case portion is formed with a positioning wall positioned along the outer shape of the projecting plate portion. When the protruding plate portion that protrudes from one of the first case portion and the second case portion is arranged on the rear surface of the other of the first case portion and the second case portion before attaching the rear plate member, the protruding plate The part can be positioned by a positioning wall. Therefore, it is possible to improve workability when assembling the case member.

In addition, the positioning wall need not be formed continuously along the outer shape of the protruding plate portion, and may be formed intermittently. That is, it is not necessary to provide the positioning walls over the entire contour of the protruding plate portion, and the positioning walls need only be partially interspersed with respect to the contour of the protruding plate portion.

In the game machine D4, the protruding height of the positioning wall is equal to the thickness dimension of the projecting plate portion, and the protruding end surface of the positioning wall serves as a seat surface for receiving the back plate member. A game machine D5.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects of the game machine D4, the protruding end surface of the positioning wall serves as a seat surface for receiving the back plate member. The contact area between the case part and the other part can be increased, and the connection between the two can be strengthened. Thereby, the rigidity of the case portion as a whole can be increased.

In game machines D1 to D5, a second rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member, and one end of which is pivotally supported by the second rotating member and the other end of which is displaceably connected to the second case portion A gaming machine D6 characterized by comprising: a connecting member that

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D1 to D5, one end of the connecting member is pivotally supported by the second rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member, and the other end of the connecting member is displaceably connected to the second case member, when the arm member is displaced with respect to the case member, the angle formed by the arm member and the connecting member (when one end of the connecting member is connected to the second rotating member and a straight line connecting the connecting position where one end of the connecting member is connected to the second rotating member and the connecting position where the other end of the connecting member is connected to the second case member. The second rotating member can be relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to the arm member in accordance with the change in the angle formed. That is, the driving means for applying the driving force to the arm member can also serve as the means for rotating the second rotating member. Only one driving means for displacing can achieve two actions of displacing the arm member and rotating the second rotating member.

In this case, since the other end of the connecting member is displaceably arranged in the second case portion, the distance between the arm shaft of the arm member and the other end of the connecting member can be increased. As a result, the amount of displacement of the arm member can be increased, and the presentation effect by displacing the arm member can be enhanced.

As for the relationship between the connecting member and the case member, it is sufficient that the other end of the connecting member is connected to the case member so as to be displaceable. Even in the case where the second case part is used as it is, it is relatively easy to deal with it. Therefore, by adopting the configuration in which the other end of the connecting member is connected to the second case portion instead of the first case portion, the case member can be efficiently used for other models and the arm member can be displaced. It is possible to achieve both volume expansion.

A gaming machine E1, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A11, gaming machines B1 to B8, gaming machines C1 to C10, or gaming machines D1 to D6. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine E2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A11, gaming machines B1 to B8, gaming machines C1 to C10, or gaming machines D1 to D6. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of game machines A1 to A11, game machines B1 to B8, game machines C1 to C10, or game machines D1 to D6, the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Gaming machine E3. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 third pattern display device (liquid crystal display device)
400 case member 410 first base body (part of case member, first case portion)
413 Regulating rib 415 Seat wall (positioning wall)
430 second base body (second case part)
431 guide groove 433 edge portion 434 projecting plate portion 450 rear plate member 500 first arm (arm member)
511a guide groove 520 arm shaft 531 drive motor (driving means)
533 wheel gear (rotating body)
533a flat surface (flat surface of insertion hole)
533b insertion hole 533e projection 533e1 flat surface (flat surface of projection)
534, 2534, 3534 Retaining ring 534a Opening end 534b Annular portion 534c Overhanging portions 2534c, 3534c Overhanging portion 540 First rotary decorative body (decorative member, first rotary member)
542 shaft 542a flat surface (flat surface of D-shaped cross section)
542b D-shaped cross section 542c Circumferential grooves 2542d, 3542d Engaged portion 550 Second rotary decoration (second rotary member)
600 second arm (connecting member)
700 Gear member 710 Gear body 720 Detected portion 730 Projecting pin 790 Gear shaft 900 Drive motor (driving means)
L1 Straight line L2 connecting projecting pin and arm shaft Straight line θ connecting projecting pin and gear shaft Angle S formed by straight lines L1 and L2 Rotational position detection sensor (rotational position detection means)

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine, comprising a gear member having teeth formed on the outer circumference and an insertion hole formed in the center thereof, and a shaft body inserted through the insertion hole of the gear member, the insertion hole being formed of the gear member. A structure is known in which rotational torque can be transmitted between a gear member and a shaft by utilizing engagement between flat surfaces provided on the inner surface and the outer surface of the shaft.

JP 2012-115580 A

A circumferential groove is recessed in the tip of the shaft, and after the shaft is inserted into the insertion hole of the gear member, the retaining ring is fitted into the circumferential groove of the shaft, whereby the shaft is It is made not to slip out of the insertion hole. In this case, the operation of fitting the retaining ring into the circumferential groove involves locking the shaft body and the retaining ring with one arm and the other arm of a tool such as radio pliers, respectively, and bringing these one arm and the other arm close to each other. It is done by displacing in the direction. However, there is a problem that the shaft may be damaged by being caught by the arm of the tool during the fitting operation.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing damage to the shaft body.

In order to achieve this object, a game machine according to claim 1 is provided with a D-shaped cross-sectional portion formed in a D-shaped cross section by making a part of the outer surface of the cylindrical shaft-shaped body flat, and a D-shaped cross-sectional portion thereof. A part of the inner surface of the circular hole is made flat so that the shaft having a circumferential groove recessed along the circumferential direction in the outer surface of the part and the D-shaped cross section of the shaft can be inserted. a rotating body having an insertion hole formed in a D-shaped cross section, and rotating together with the shaft by engaging the flat surface of the insertion hole and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section, and the rotating body and a retaining ring fitted in the circumferential groove to prevent the shaft from slipping out of the insertion hole in the axial direction, and a drive means for applying rotational driving force to the shaft or the rotating body There is, and the said rotating body is provided with the projection part projected along the said shaft from the axial direction end surface.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the D-shaped cross section of the shaft is inserted into the insertion hole of the rotating body, and the circumferential groove of the D-shaped end face of the shaft protruding from the axial end face of the rotating body By fitting the retaining ring in the hole, the shaft is prevented from slipping out in the axial direction from the insertion hole of the rotating body. In this case, the axial end face of the rotating body has a projection along the shaft. A tool such as pliers can be used to lock and work. That is, there is no need to lock the shaft with a tool. Therefore, the retaining ring can be fitted into the circumferential groove of the shaft without damaging the shaft. This is particularly effective when the shaft is made of brass, since it is easily damaged. Examples of damage to the shaft include damage to the surface of the shaft and bending of the axis of the shaft.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine, illustrating a state in which a first arm and a second arm of an arm operation unit are arranged at a first position; FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the arm operation unit in a state where the first arm and the second arm are arranged at the first position; FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the arm operation unit in a state where the first arm and the second arm are arranged at the first position; FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the arm operation unit with the first arm and the second arm arranged at the second position; FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the arm operation unit with the first arm and the second arm arranged at the second position; (a) is a front perspective view of a first arm, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the first arm. (a) is a partially enlarged front perspective view in which the distal end side of the first arm is in an exploded state, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear perspective view in which the distal end side of the first arm is in an exploded state. be. Fig. 10 is a partially enlarged rear view of the container of the first arm; FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the connecting portion between the wheel gear of the rotating mechanism and the shaft of the first rotary decoration. (a) is a top view of the shaft, (b) is a front view of the shaft viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14 (a), and (c) is an arrow XIVc in FIG. FIG. 14(d) is a top view of the wheel gear, (e) is a cross-sectional view of the wheel gear taken along line XIVe-XIVe in FIG. ) is a front view of the wheel gear as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVf in FIG. 14(d), and (g) is a top view of the retaining ring. (a) to (c) are partially enlarged top views of the wheel gear. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged top views of the rotation mechanism. (a) is a front perspective view of a second arm, and (b) is a back perspective view of the second arm. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of the gear member, the reduction gear, and the drive motor attached to the first base body; FIG. 10 is a front view of the gear member in a state where the first arm is connected; (a) is a front view of a gear member, (b) is a side view of the gear member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. It is a sectional view of a gear member in line XXc. (a) is a front view of the first base body, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first base body taken along line XXIb-XXIb of FIG. 21(a). (a) is a front view of the first arm and the second arm and the gear member arranged at the first position, and (b) is a portion of the first arm and the gear member in section XXIIb of FIG. 22(a). It is an enlarged front view. 22(a) is a front view of the first arm, the second arm, and the gear member in a state in which the gear member is reversely rotated from the state shown in FIG. 22(a), and FIG. It is a partially enlarged front view of the first arm and the gear member in the XXIIIb section. (a) is a front view of the first arm and the second arm and the gear member arranged at the second position, and (b) is a portion of the first arm and the gear member in section XXIVb of FIG. 24 (a). It is an enlarged front view. 24(a) is a front view of the first arm, the second arm, and the gear member in a state in which the gear member is forwardly rotated from the state shown in FIG. 24(a), and FIG. It is a partially enlarged front view of the first arm and the gear member in the XXVb section. (a) is a front view of a second base body, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second base taken along line XXVIb-XXVIb of FIG. 26(a). It is an exploded back perspective view of a case body. (a) is a partially enlarged rear view of the second projection, (b) is a side view of the second projection viewed in the direction of arrow XXVIIIb in FIG. 28 (a), and (c) is a ) is a cross-sectional view of the second projection taken along line XXVIIIc-XXVIIIc of FIG. (a) is a front view of the shaft and the retaining ring in the second embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the shaft and the retaining ring taken along the line XXIXb-XXIXb of FIG. 29 (a), and (c ) is a front view of the shaft and the retaining ring in the third embodiment, and (d) is a sectional view of the shaft and the retaining ring taken along line XXIXd-XXIXd of FIG. 29(c).

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 28. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. The general winning opening 63, the first ball opening 64, the second ball opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. reference). The general winning hole 63, the first ball-entering hole 64, the second ball-entering hole 640, the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged on the game board. 13 is fixed by a wood screw or the like from the front side.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is formed by dividing the front surface of the game board 13 by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin arc member (not shown) formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is a substantially circular area (area where a winning hole or the like is arranged and the shot ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. In addition, in the state of the pachinko machine 10, between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, an arc connecting the rails is formed on the inner surface side of the resin. A circular arc member made of .

Two first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are arranged in the upper right part of the game area in front view (the upper right part in FIG. 2). The first pattern display device 37A is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Aa and a 7-segment display 37Ab, which are light emitting means. The other first symbol display device 37B is similarly provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Ba and a 7-segment display 37Bb, which are light emitting means.

The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying in accordance with each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. ing. Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Both of the plurality of LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba indicate by the lighting state whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variable, the time saving or the normal state, or indicate by the lighting state whether it is changing or not, and the stop pattern is variable. The lighting state indicates whether the pattern corresponds to the big win, the pattern corresponds to the normal jackpot, or the winning pattern, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display devices 37Ab and 37Bb both display the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba are configured to emit light of different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the colors of light, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is conducted when a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big win as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but also indicate a symbol corresponding to the type of the big win in the case of a big win.

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, and the second entrance A game state in which a ball is likely to enter 640. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or during the time reduction, not only the probability of winning the second symbol is increased, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be in a state where it is easy to hit the ball. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 during the probability change or during the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened more than during normal operation. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened and once per hit. It is also possible to change at least one of the number of times to perform. In addition, during the probability change or during the time saving, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per time is not set, and the second symbol is used. Only the winning probability may be changed so as to be increased compared to normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that variably displays three patterns, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 displays the gaming state under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is displayed in a predetermined manner. It is configured to be activated (released) only for a period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more chances to open the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the variable probability and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the state is such that the ball can easily enter the ball, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the balls flowing down the right side of the game board among the balls launched to the game board can pass through. . When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol reservation lamp (not shown) is also lit. Is displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Also, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reserved lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball inlet 64, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first ball entrance 64 in front view, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is provided. When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first ball entry hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640 are also one of winning holes through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are different numbers, for example , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is five. may

The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for a ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), which makes it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 .

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ ” is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the probability change and the time reduction than during normal times.

Here, the probability of a big win when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, both in a low probability state and a high probability state. are identical. However, the probability that the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is higher than the probability that the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a big win. set higher than the case. On the other hand, the first ball entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second ball entrance 640, and is in a state in which a ball can be entered at all times.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640. A ball is shot toward the opening 64 so as to pass through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by entering the first ball opening 64, there are many opportunities for a big winning lottery. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second ball entrance 640 is easy to enter. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the second ball entrance 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting"), passes through the through gate 67, and the electric accessory is in an open state, and it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by entering a ball into the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A variable prize winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large opening) 65a is provided in the approximate center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 results in a big win, the jackpot lottery is won after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses. The LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A or the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B is lit so as to become a stop symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the occurrence of the big win is made. shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and both. The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time when the LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba corresponding to the big win are lit in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. A game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a special game state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and a plurality (for example, two) may be arranged. The left side of 80 is also acceptable.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the center and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. The certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are It can be viewed through a small window 35 (see FIG. 1) in the frame 14 .

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through an out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by means of a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 executes major processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device. do.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return destination addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power supply is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power interruption (including the time of power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the front side of the opening and closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the side, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. do.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power failure, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

FIG. 5 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, showing a state in which the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 of the arm operation unit 300 are arranged at the first position.

As shown in FIG. 5, the arm operation unit 300 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13 (the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 5), and moves the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 between the first position and the second position. formed displaceable between.

At the first position, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 protrude toward the center of the game board 13, as shown in FIG. While arranged in the front center of the three-symbol display device 81, at the second position, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are retracted to the side of the third-symbol display device 81 and retracted to the back side of the game board 13. be done. Along with this, the first rotating decorative body 540 and the second rotating decorative body 550 are rendered invisible to the player (see FIG. 2).

Next, a detailed configuration of the arm operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 28. FIG.

6 and 7 are perspective views of the arm operation unit 300 with the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 arranged at the first position, and FIGS. 8 and 9 are perspective views of the first arm 500 and the second arm 600. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the arm operating unit 300 with the arm 600 arranged at the second position; 7 and 9 show a state in which the first cover body 420 and the second cover body 440 are removed.

As shown in FIGS. 6 to 9, the arm operation unit 300 includes a box-shaped first base body 410 open on one side, and a first base body 410 fastened and fixed to one side of the first base body 410. A first cover body 420 that closes an open portion, a second base body 430 that is detachably connected to the first base body 410 and has a partial box shape with one side open, and one side of the second base body 430. A case member 400 is formed by these members 410 , 420 , 430 , 440 , which are fastened and fixed to the side and close the open portion (box-shaped portion) of the second base member 430 . Each member 410, 420, 430, 440 is made of a light transmissive material.

The case member 400 includes a first arm 500 and a second arm 600, a gear member 700 connected to the first arm 500, and a drive motor 900 that imparts rotational driving force to the gear member 700 via a reduction gear 800. and are arranged.

The first arm 500 is rotatably supported by the first base body 410 and the first cover body 420 via an arm shaft 520, and is centered on the arm shaft 520 at a first position (see FIGS. 6 and 7) and a first position. It is displaceable between two positions (FIGS. 8 and 9). Here, the first arm 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG.

10(a) is a front perspective view of the first arm 500, and FIG. 10(b) is a rear perspective view of the first arm 500. FIG. 11(a) is a partially enlarged front perspective view in which the distal end side of the first arm 500 is in an exploded state, and FIG. Fig. 3 is a rear perspective view enlarged in perspective;

As shown in FIG. 10, the first arm 500 includes a main body member 510 made of a resin material, an arm shaft 520 that rotatably supports the main body member 510 on the first base body 410, and a main body portion 510. A rotating mechanism 530 disposed on the tip side, a first rotating decoration body 540 rotationally driven by the rotating mechanism 530, and a second rotating decoration body 550 disposed on the back side of the first rotating decoration body 540. and

The main body member 510 includes a connecting side main body 511, a swinging side main body 512 connected to an end of the connecting side main body 511, and an end of the swinging side main body 512 opposite to the connecting side main body 511. The connecting body 511, the swinging side body 512, and the housing body 513 are integrally formed from a resin material.

The connection-side main body 511 is a portion formed in a long flat plate shape, and a guide groove 511 a opened in the plate surface extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the connection-side main body 511 . A protruding pin 730 of the gear member 700 is inserted through the guide groove 511a (see FIG. 19), and the connecting side main body 511 and the gear member 700 are connected via the guide groove 511a and the protruding pin 730. As shown in FIG.

The connecting-side main body 511 is provided with a wall portion 511b which is continuous along the outer edge of the flat plate-like portion and the inner edge of the guide groove 511a and which has a rectangular rib shape in cross section. As a result, the rigidity of the connecting-side main body 511 is improved, so that twisting deformation of the connecting-side main body 511 when the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a is pressed by the protruding pin 730 can be suppressed. Therefore, the projecting pin 730 of the gear member 700 can be smoothly moved along the guide groove 511a. In addition, by providing the wall portion 511b along the outer edge of the flat plate shape and the inner edge of the guide groove 511a in this way, the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a can be achieved while ensuring the rigidity of the connection-side main body 511 and reducing the weight. , the pressure-receiving area pressed by the protruding pin 730 can be secured, and as a result, the durability of the connecting-side main body 511 and the gear member 700 (protruding pin 730) can be improved.

The rocking side main body 512 is formed in such a shape that the side connected to the connecting side main body 511 is curved in an arc shape and the side opposite to the connecting side main body 511 is bent in a dogleg shape. The arm shaft 520 is integrally formed at the connecting portion between the swing-side main body 512 and the connecting-side main body 511, and extends vertically from the plate-like portions of the connecting-side main body 511 and the swing-side main body 512 toward the rear side. be erected.

Here, the swing-side main body 512 is formed in a flat-plate-like shape parallel to the flat-plate-like portion of the connecting-side main body 511 and continues along the outer edge of the flat-plate-like portion and is erected from the flat-plate-like portion. A hollow box with a rectangular cross section having an internal space is formed from a substrate having rib-shaped walls with a rectangular cross section and a flat plate body fastened and fixed to the upstanding tip side of the wall of the substrate. .

As a result, the section modulus of the swing-side main body 512 is ensured to prevent bending deformation, and the weight of the swing-side main body 512 is reduced. load can be reduced. Therefore, since the length dimension of the swing-side main body 512 can be increased, the amount of movement of the front decoration 540 and the like accompanying the displacement of the first arm 500 can be increased, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Further, since the swing-side main body 512 has a hollow box shape, the internal space is used to route the electrical wiring (power supply line, signal line, etc., not shown) of the rotating mechanism 530 ( wiring). As a result, damage to the electrical wiring can be suppressed. In particular, in this embodiment, after the electrical wiring of the rotating mechanism 530 is passed through the internal space of the swinging side main body 512, it is connected to the end of the swinging side main body 512 (that is, the connecting side main body 511). part, where the arm shaft 520 is formed). The arm shaft 520 is the center of rotation of the first arm 500 and is the portion where the displacement of the first arm 500 is the minimum. It is possible to improve the durability of the wiring lead-out portion.

The container 513 is arranged on the tip side of the swing-side main body 512 (that is, the end opposite to the end connected to the connecting-side main body 511), and is formed in a cylindrical shape that is circular when viewed from the front. A rotating mechanism 530 that imparts a rotational driving force to the first rotating decorative body 540 is disposed in the internal space of the shape. A detailed configuration of the rotation mechanism 530 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 12 to 16. FIG.

The container 513 includes a large-diameter portion 513a to which the swing-side main body 512 is connected to the outer peripheral surface, a small-diameter portion 513b having an outer peripheral surface smaller in diameter than the large-diameter portion 513a, and the large-diameter portion 513a and the small-diameter portion 513b. A stepped portion 513c formed as a flat end surface perpendicular to the axis is provided between them, and the second main body 551 of the second rotary decoration 550 is rotatably fitted on the small diameter portion 513b.

The first rotating decorative body 540 is disposed on the tip side (accommodating body 513) of the first arm 500, and is a member that performs an effect by rotation. It has a shaft-shaped shaft 542 located in the center and protruding from the rear side, and a first decorative portion 543 that decorates the front side of the first main body 541 . A rotational driving force is applied to the shaft 542 from the rotation mechanism 530, so that the first rotary decorative body 540 (first decorative portion 543) is rotated relative to the container 513 (first arm 500).

In the present embodiment, the first decorative portion 543 is formed on the front side of the first main body 541 so that a plurality of tapered sharp-angled bodies radially extend outward from the center in the radial direction. In addition, the first decorative portion 543 is partially formed of a light-transmitting material on the front side so that light emitted from an LED (not shown) disposed inside can be visually recognized.

The second rotating decorative body 550 is arranged coaxially with the shaft body 542 on the back side of the first rotating decorative body 540, and is a member that performs an effect by rotation. It has a flat plate-like extending portion 552 that extends radially outward from the outer peripheral side of the second main body 551 , and a second decorative portion 553 that decorates the outer peripheral side of the second main body 551 . An end portion of a second arm 600, which will be described later, is rotatably connected to the extended distal end of the extended portion 552 (see FIG. 17).

The second rotary decorative body 550 is rotatably supported by the container 513 by fitting the second main body 551 onto the small-diameter portion 513b of the container 513, as described above. In this case, when the shaft 542 of the first rotary decoration 540 is connected to the rotating mechanism 530, the second rotary decoration 550 (second main body 551) is the first main body 541 of the first rotary decoration 540. Movement in the axial direction is restricted between the back surface and the stepped portion 513c of the container 513 . That is, the second rotary decoration 550 is rotatably held between the first rotary decoration 540 and the container 513 .

In addition, since the second rotating decorative body 550 is disposed on the back side of the first rotating decorative body 540 (that is, on the game board 13 side), the second arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced. The trajectory of the second arm 600 or the extension part 552 overlaps the first rotary decoration body 540, and the first decoration part 543 of the first rotation decoration body 540 is prevented from being partially hidden by the second arm 600 or the extension part 552. can. That is, while the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced, the entire first rotary decoration pair 540 (first decoration portion 543) can be exposed.

Next, referring to FIGS. 12 to 16, the rotation mechanism 530 and the connection structure between the rotation mechanism 530 and the shaft 542 of the first rotary decoration 540 will be described. 12 is a partially enlarged rear view of the container 513 of the first arm 500, and FIG. 13 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the connecting portion between the wheel gear 533 of the rotating mechanism 530 and the shaft 542 of the first rotating decorative body 540. It is a diagram. 13, illustration of the first main body 541 and the first decoration portion 543 of the first rotary decoration body 540 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the rotation mechanism 530 includes a drive motor 531 that generates rotational driving force, a worm gear 532 that is axially attached to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 531, and the worm gear 532 that is engaged with the drive motor 531. Also, a wheel gear 533 in which the shaft 542 of the first rotary decoration 540 is inserted, and a retaining ring 534 that functions as a stopper for the shaft 542 of the first rotary decoration 540 inserted in the wheel gear 533. Prepare. The worm gear 532 is formed as a worm (screw gear), and the wheel gear 533 is formed as a worm wheel (helical gear).

The wheel gear 533 is disposed in the central portion of the container 513, and the shaft 542 of the first rotary decoration 540 is inserted into the insertion hole 533b (see FIG. 14) of the wheel gear 533 from the front side of the container 513. Interpolation (insertion) is performed (see FIG. 11). A retaining ring 534 is fitted in a circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 542 inserted into the wheel gear 533, thereby restricting the shaft body 542 from slipping out of the insertion hole 533b of the wheel gear 533 in the axial direction.

The detailed configuration of the shaft 542 and the wheel gear 533 of the first rotary decoration 540 will be described with reference to FIG. 14 . 14(a) is a top view of the shaft 542, FIG. 14(b) is a front view of the shaft 542 as seen in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14(a), and FIG. It is a side view of the shaft 542 seen in the direction of arrow XIVc in FIG. 14(a). FIG. 14(d) is a top view of the wheel gear 533, FIG. 14(e) is a cross-sectional view of the wheel gear 533 taken along line XIVe-XIVe of FIG. 14(d), and FIG. It is a front view of the wheel gear 533 seen in the direction of arrow XIVf in FIG. 14(d). 14(g) is a top view of the retaining ring 534. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 14( a ) to 14 ( c ), the shaft 542 is a cylindrical shaft-shaped body (that is, a shaft-shaped body with a circular cross section) whose outer surface partially extends in the axial direction (FIGS. 14( b ) and 14 ( c )). FIG. 14 (c) vertical direction) is a flat surface 542a that is parallel to the D-shaped cross-sectional portion 542b that is formed in a D-shaped cross section, and the outer surface of the D-shaped cross-sectional portion b along the circumferential direction. and a circumferential groove 542c having a U-shaped cross section which is continuously recessed and is formed of a brass material.

The flat surface 542a is formed in a predetermined range from the axial end surface (upper surface) of the shaft 542 along the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 14(b)). That is, the flat surface 542a is also formed on the tip side (upper surface side) of the shaft body 542 relative to the circumferential groove 542c. The tip of the shaft 542 (D-shaped cross section 542b) in the axial direction is tapered by chamfering (C-face machining) the corners. As a result, the work of inserting into the insertion hole 533b can be performed smoothly.

As shown in FIGS. 14(d) to 14(f), the wheel gear 533 includes a cylindrical base portion 533c having an insertion hole 533b in the center and gears engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the base portion 533c. and a projecting portion 533e projecting along the axial direction (vertical direction in FIGS. 14(e) and 14(f)) from the axial end surface of the base portion 533c, and is formed of a resin material. be.

The insertion hole 533b has a flat surface 533a that is a plane parallel to the axial direction so that the D-shaped cross section 542b of the shaft 542 can be inserted. It is formed to have a D-shaped cross section. As a result, when the D-shaped cross-sectional portion 542b of the shaft 542 is inserted into the insertion hole 533b, the flat surface 542a of the shaft 542 and the flat surface 533a of the insertion hole 532b are engaged with each other, whereby the shaft 542 and the hole gear are engaged. 533 to transmit driving torque.

The projecting portion 533e is such that the step in the state where the shaft 542 is inserted into the insertion hole 533b to the limit position (that is, the terminal end of the flat surface 542a of the shaft 542 (lower end in FIG. 14(b)) is the lower surface of the wheel gear 533 ( The projection height is set so as to project in the axial direction from the upper surface of the shaft body 542 when it is in contact with the axial end surface (lower side surface in FIG. 14(e)) (see FIG. 13).

A flat surface 533e1, which is a plane parallel to the axial direction, is formed on the protrusion 533e on the insertion hole 533b side (that is, the side facing the shaft 542). are formed continuously (that is, on the same plane) with the flat surface 533a formed in the insertion hole 533b. As a result, the flat surface 533e1 formed on the protruding portion 533e and the flat surface 533a formed on the insertion hole 533b can simultaneously engage with the flat surface 542a formed on the D-shaped cross-sectional portion 542b of the shaft 542. be.

On the other hand, the protruding portion 533e is formed such that the rear surface opposite to the flat surface 533e1 (the outer peripheral surface, the right side surface in FIG. 14(d)) continues to the outer peripheral surface of the base portion 533c. As will be described later, the projecting portion 533e is a portion that receives a load when the retaining ring 534 is attached or when rotational torque is transmitted between the shaft body 542 and the wheel gear 533, ensuring durability. There is a need to. Therefore, the projecting portion 533e is formed at a position that is in phase with the flat surface 533a in the insertion hole 533b of the wheel gear 533. As shown in FIG.

That is, in the portion of the wheel gear 533 where the flat surface 533a is formed in the insertion hole 533b, the base portion 533c is the thickest in the radial direction (left-right direction in FIGS. 14(d) and 14(e)). maximum) and strength is ensured. Therefore, by forming the projecting portion 533e at a portion of the insertion hole 533b that is in the same phase as the flat surface 533a, the load acting from the projecting portion 533e can be received by a thick portion that ensures strength. , the durability of the wheel member 533 can be improved accordingly. Further, if the position of the insertion hole 533b is in the same phase as the flat surface 533a, the cross-sectional area of the protrusion 533e can be increased. It is possible to improve the quality.

As shown in FIG. 14(g), the retaining ring 534 includes an annular portion 534b formed by cutting a part of the annular shape to form an open end 534a, and an inner peripheral side of the annular portion 534b. It is formed as an E-shaped retaining ring having projecting portions 534c projecting radially inward from three locations. The retaining ring 534 is manufactured by punching out an E shape shown in FIG. However, the retaining ring 534 may be made of a steel material or an aluminum alloy material.

The projecting ends of the three projecting portions 534c are formed in concentric circular arc shapes, and the imaginary circle formed by connecting the projecting ends is slightly smaller than the diameter of the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 542. be. Therefore, when the retaining ring 534 is fitted into the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 542, the bottom surface of the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 542 is pressed by the arc-shaped projecting tip of the projecting portion 534c of the retaining ring 534. . That is, the snap ring 534 can be rotated together with the shaft body 542 until the pressing force is exceeded by the overhanging tip of the overhanging portion 534c being in close contact with the bottom surface of the circumferential groove 542c (from the shaft body 542). Rotational torque can be transmitted to the protrusion 533e via the retaining ring 534).

A process of connecting the shaft 542 of the first rotary decoration 540 to the rotation mechanism 530 will be described with reference to FIG. 15 . 15(a) to 15(c) are partially enlarged top views of the wheel gear 533. FIG.

15(a) shows the state before the snap ring 534 is attached to the shaft 542, and FIG. 15(b) shows the state after the snap ring 534 is attached to the shaft 542. . FIG. 15(c) is a reference diagram of the rotation mechanism 530, showing a form in which the protrusion 533e is omitted. FIGS. 15(a) to 15(c) schematically illustrate a state in which the distance between the flat surfaces 533a, 533e1 of the wheel gear 533 and the flat surface 542a of the shaft 542 is enlarged.

In the step of connecting the shaft 542 of the first rotary decoration 540 to the rotation mechanism 530, first, the first rotary decoration 540 is attached to the front side of the container 513 while the second rotary decoration 550 is interposed ( See Figure 11). As a result, the D-shaped cross-sectional portion 542b of the shaft body 542 of the first rotary decorative body 540 inserted through the insertion hole 533b of the wheel gear 533 is aligned with the axial end face (upper surface of FIG. 15A) of the wheel gear 533. ), a retaining ring 534 is fitted into a circumferential groove 542c formed in the D-shaped end face portion 542b.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15A, with the open end 534a facing the shaft 542, the snap ring 534 is placed on the side opposite to the projection 533e (at a phase of 180° relative to the projection 533e). 15(b), the retaining ring 534 is fitted into the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft 542 (see FIG. 13).

In this case, according to this embodiment, one arm of the needle-nose pliers is engaged with the rear surface of the protrusion 533e (the surface opposite to the flat surface 533e1), and the other arm of the needle-nose pliers is attached to the retaining ring 534. By locking the rear side of (the side opposite to the open end 534a) and bringing the one and other arms close to each other, the retaining ring 534 can be fitted into the circumferential groove 542c.

That is, since the shaft 542 is not directly locked by the arms of the needle nose pliers, damage to the surface of the shaft 542 and bending of the shaft 542 (bending of the axis) can be suppressed. In particular, since the shaft body 542 is made of a brass material and is easily plastically deformed, the surface thereof is likely to be damaged or deformed by bending, which is effective. Further, the projecting portion 533e is formed integrally with the wheel gear 533, that is, is formed from a resin material, so that it is possible to prevent the engaged arms of the needle nose pliers from slipping. Therefore, it is possible to improve workability when fitting the retaining ring 534 .

As shown in FIG. 15(b), when the retaining ring 534 is attached to the shaft 542, the projection 533e is positioned between the opposite opening ends 534a of the retaining ring 534, so that the retaining ring 534 is attached to the shaft. 542 can be prevented from falling off from the circumferential groove 542c.

Here, in the shaft body 542 (D-shaped stepped surface portion 542b), there is a region where the recess depth of the circumferential groove 542c is reduced by the amount of the flat surface 542a formed. That is, between the D-shaped section 542b and the retaining ring 534, there is a relative rotational position where the engagement between the two is easily released. The engagement allowance with is reduced. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(c) as a reference example, when the snap ring 534 is rotatable relative to the shaft 542 without the projection 533e, the tension of the snap ring 534 is 1. A relative rotational position can be formed in which the protruding portion 534c is positioned on the flat surface 542a of the shaft body 542. In this relative rotational position, as a whole, the engagement margin between the protruding portion 534c and the inner wall surface of the circumferential groove 542c is large. Decrease. Therefore, if a load is applied to the shaft 542 in a direction in which it escapes from the insertion hole 533b of the wheel gear 533, the snap ring 534 may slip out of the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft 542 in the axial direction. In such a relative rotation position, even if no load is applied to the shaft body 542 in a pulling-out direction, the retaining ring 534 may fall off due to the contact of another member or the like with the retaining ring 534 .

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the protrusion 533e is positioned between the opposing opening ends 534a of the retaining ring 534 fitted in the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft 542, so that the opening end 534a of the retaining ring 534 is brought into contact with the protrusion 533e to suppress the relative rotation of the retaining ring 534 with respect to the shaft 542. As a result, the relative rotational position between the shaft 542 and the retaining ring 534 can be maintained at an appropriate position, so that the retaining ring 534 can be prevented from falling out of the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft 542 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the connection structure between the rotating mechanism 530 (wheel gear 533) and the shaft 542 of the first rotating decorative body 540 will be described. 16(a) and 16(b) are partial enlarged top views of the rotation mechanism 530. In FIG. (b) shows the state after the shaft 542 has been rotated with respect to the wheel gear 533, respectively.

16(a) and 16(b), in order to facilitate understanding of the relative rotation state of the wheel gear 533 and the shaft 542, the gap between the flat surfaces 533a, 533e1 and the flat surface 542a is Schematically enlarged and illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 16(a) and 16(b), the wheel gear 533 has not only a flat surface 533a formed in the insertion hole 533b, but also a flat surface 533e1 connected to the flat surface 533a formed on the projecting portion 533e. Both flat surfaces 533a, 533e1 are engageable with the flat surface 542a in the D-shaped section 542b of the shaft 542 (see FIG. 14). That is, the area of engagement with the flat surface 542a of the shaft 542 can be increased by the amount of the flat surface 533e1 formed on the protrusion 533e, and the rotational torque can be dispersed accordingly. As a result, durability of the shaft 542 and the wheel gear 533 can be improved.

Further, as described above, the protrusion 533e that abuts the open end 534a of the retaining ring 534 and serves to suppress the relative rotation of the retaining ring 534 with respect to the shaft 542 is provided with the D-shaped cross section of the shaft 542. 542b is engaged with the flat surface 542a to also serve as a bearing for rotational torque. As a result, while improving the durability of the shaft 542 and the wheel gear 533, compared to the case where the base portion 533c of the wheel gear 533 is extended in the axial direction to secure the engagement area with the flat surface 542a. , miniaturization and weight reduction can be achieved.

Here, as described above, the retaining ring 534 is formed such that the projecting tips of the three projecting portions 534c can press the bottom surface of the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft 542. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when the retaining ring 534 is fitted into the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 542, the retaining ring 534 can be rotated together with the shaft body 542 (that is, the shaft body 542 can be rotated to the protrusion 533e via the retaining ring 534). torque can be transmitted).

As a result, the rotational torque transmitted between the wheel gear 533 and the shaft 542 is not received only between the flat surfaces 533a, 533e1 of the wheel gear 533 and the flat surface 542a of the shaft 542, but the wheel It can also be supported between the protrusion 533e of the gear 533 and the open end 534a of the retaining ring 534. As a result, the rotational torque can be distributed, and the durability of the shaft 542 and the wheel gear 533 can be improved accordingly.

Further, in order to increase the engagement area of the flat surfaces 533a and 542a and improve the durability, as described above, the size and weight of the wheel gear 533 (base portion 533c) are increased. As in the present embodiment, the retaining ring 534, which serves to prevent the shaft 542 from coming off, also serves to bear the rotational torque. can be improved.

Here, the mechanism for rotating the first rotating decorative body 540 (first decorative portion 543) is large because the first decorative portion 543 is relatively large and heavy in order to function as a decorative body. Durability is required to withstand rotational torque. On the other hand, since the mechanism is arranged at the tip position when the first arm 500 is displaced around the arm axis 520, it should be lightweight in order to suppress the inertial force when the first arm 500 is displaced. is required.

On the other hand, according to the rotating mechanism 530 of the present embodiment, as described above, the flat surface 533e1 of the protrusion 533e and the retaining ring 534 can be used to receive the rotating torque, thereby ensuring durability. At the same time, the inertial force can be reduced by reducing the weight, and the displacement of the first arm 500 can be performed smoothly.

Returning to FIG. 6 to FIG. 9, description will be made. One end of the second arm 600 is rotatably supported by the extending portion 552 (see FIG. 11) of the second rotating decorative body 550, and the other end is connected to the second base body 430 and the second cover body 440 so as to be displaceable. be done. That is, as the first arm 500 is displaced around the arm shaft 520, the pivotal support portion at one end is relatively rotated, while the other end is displaceable along the guide groove 431 of the second base member 430. be. Here, the second arm 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 17 .

17(a) is a front perspective view of the second arm 600, and FIG. 17(b) is a rear perspective view of the second arm 600. FIG. As shown in FIG. 17, the second arm 600 includes a main body member 610 made of a resin material in an elongated shape, a fixed decoration 620 fixed to one end of the main body member 610, and the other end of the main body portion 610. and a guide body 630 which is a columnar body with a circular cross section and protrudes toward the rear side.

The main body member 610 has a flat plate-shaped portion arranged on the front side of the main body member 610 and a rib-shaped wall having a rectangular cross section that continues along the outer edge of the flat plate-shaped portion and stands from the flat plate-shaped portion. A hollow box having a rectangular cross-section and having an internal space is formed from a base body having a portion and a flat plate body fastened and fixed to the upstanding tip side of the wall portion of the base body.

As a result, the section modulus of the main body member 610 is ensured to prevent bending deformation, while the weight of the main body member 610 is reduced, and the load on the drive motor 900 when displacing the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 is reduced. can. In addition, since the main body member 610 has a hollow box shape, the internal space can be used to route (wire) the electrical connection lines of the fixed decorative body 620 . As a result, damage to the electrical wiring can be suppressed.

The fixed decorative body 620 is a member arranged on the tip side (one end side) of the second arm 600 (main body member 610), and has a connecting pin 621 which is a cylindrical body with a circular cross section projecting from the rear surface thereof. Prepare. The connecting pin 621 is pivotally supported via the collar C1 in the pivot hole 552a opened at the extending tip of the extending portion 552 of the second rotary ornament 550, so that one end of the second arm 600 is connected to the first arm. It is connected to the arm 500 (the second rotary decoration 550) so as to be relatively rotatable.

In addition, in this embodiment, the fixed decorative body 620 is formed in a form in which star shapes are superimposed concentrically. In addition, the fixed decorative body 620 is partially formed of a light-transmitting material on the front side so that light emission from an LED (not shown) disposed inside can be visually recognized.

A pair of guide bodies 630 are arranged at a predetermined interval. This guide body 630 is displaceably inserted into the guide groove 431 of the second base body 430 via the collar C2, so that the other end of the second arm 600 can slide along the guide groove 431. , and is connected to the second base body 430 (see FIGS. 6 to 9).

In addition, in the first position where the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 protrude in front of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIGS. 5 to 7), the fixed decorative body 620 side of the pair of collars C2 The positioned collar C2 abuts against the upper end (the upper side in FIG. 7) of the guide groove 431 of the second base body 430, and is restricted from further movement, while the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 move toward the third symbol. In the second position retracted to the side of the display device 81 (the back of the game board 13) (see FIGS. 2, 8 and 9), it is located on the opposite side of the fixed decoration 620 in the pair of collars C2. The collar C2 abuts against the lower end (lower side in FIG. 9) of the guide groove 431 of the second base body 430, and its further movement is restricted.

Returning to FIG. 6 to FIG. 9, description will be made. The gear member 700 , the reduction gear 800 and the drive motor 900 are each pivotally supported by the first base body 410 , and the gear member 700 is connected to the first arm 500 via the projecting pin 730 . Here, the gear member 700, the reduction gear 800 and the drive motor 900 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. FIG.

18 is a front perspective view of the gear member 700, the reduction gear 800 and the drive motor 900 attached to the first base body 410, and FIG. 19 is a gear member with the first arm 500 connected. 700 is a front view.

As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, a pinion gear 920 is fixed to a drive shaft 910 of a drive motor 900, and one of two reduction gears 800 meshing with each other is attached to the pinion gear 920. 800 are meshed. A gear member 700 is meshed with the other reduction gear 800 of the two reduction gears 800 .

Therefore, when the drive shaft 910 of the drive motor 900 is rotationally driven, the rotational driving force of the drive shaft 910 is transmitted to the gear member 700 via the pinion gear 920 and the reduction gear 800, and the gear member 700 is rotated. .

A rotation position detection sensor S is arranged on the side of the gear member 700 on the first base body 410 . The rotational position detection sensor S is an optical sensor having a light emitting portion Sa and a light receiving portion Sb. By arranging on the trajectory, the rotational position of gear member 700 is detected based on the presence or absence of detected portion 720 (flat plate portion 723).

As shown in FIG. 19, the gear member 700 is connected to the first arm 500 (connection-side main body 511) via a protruding pin 730 inserted through the guide groove 511a. Therefore, when the gear member 700 is rotated, the first arm 500 causes the projecting pin 730 to move along the guide groove 511a and causes the connecting-side main body 511 to follow the movement trajectory of the projecting pin 730. As a result, , is displaced about the arm axis 520 (see FIGS. 6 to 9).

Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the detailed configuration of gear member 700 will be described. 20(a) is a front view of the gear member 700, FIG. 20(b) is a side view of the gear member 700 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. 20(a), and FIG. FIG. 20(a) is a cross-sectional view of the gear member 700 taken along line XXc-XXc of FIG. 20(a);

As shown in FIG. 20, the gear member 700 is rotatably arranged on the first base body 410 about a gear shaft 790 (see FIG. 18), and has teeth on its outer peripheral surface that can mesh with the reduction gear 800. A gear body 710 that is engraved, a detected portion 720 that protrudes radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the gear body 710, and a projection that protrudes upward from the detected portion 720 in parallel with the gear shaft 790. A setting pin 730 is provided, and the gear body 710, the detected portion 720, and the projecting pin 730 are integrally formed from a resin material.

The gear body 710 is formed in a disc shape, and a gear shaft 790 is fixed to a shaft hole penetrating through the center of the gear body 710 . The teeth engraved on the outer peripheral surface are formed within a central angle of 330 degrees around the shaft hole. On the upper surface of the gear body 710, four ribs extending radially from the shaft hole are erected to increase the rigidity of the whole.

The detected portion 720 is a portion to be detected by the rotational position detection sensor S, and includes a protruding base portion 721 protruding radially outward from a region on the outer peripheral surface of the gear body 710 where no teeth are formed, A pin receiving portion 722 connected to the projecting tip of the projecting base portion 721 and a flat plate portion 723 projecting radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the bottom surface side of the pin receiving portion 722 are provided.

The projecting base portion 721 is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape when viewed from above, and its thickness dimension (the vertical dimension in FIGS. 20(b) and 20(c)) is the same as the thickness dimension of the teeth of the gear body 710. . The pin receiving portion 722 is formed in a cylindrical shape and arranged in a posture in which the axis of the cylinder is parallel to the gear shaft 790 . The bottom surface side of the pin receiving portion 722 is partially cut away on the side to which the projecting base portion 721 is connected. The flat plate portion 723 is formed in a fan-shaped flat plate shape in top view that widens radially outward, and has a thickness smaller than the thickness of the teeth of the gear body 710 . Also, the bottom surface of the flat plate portion 723 is flush with the bottom surface of the pin receiving portion 722 .

The bottom surfaces of the pin receiving portion 722 and the flat plate portion 723 (the surface facing the first base body 410, the lower surface in FIGS. 20B and 20C), the outer peripheral surface of the pin receiving portion 722, and the flat plate portion The ridge line portion (that is, the bottom edge of the pin receiving portion 722 and the flat plate portion 723) where the side surfaces of 723 (the front side and the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 20(b)) intersect is formed to have an arcuate cross section. be. Therefore, as will be described later, when the bottom surface of the flat plate portion 723 comes into contact with the restricting rib 413 (see FIG. 21) due to the inclination of the gear member 700 (tilt of the detected portion 720), the flat plate portion It is possible to prevent the edge of the bottom surface of 723 from being caught on the regulation rib 413 . Therefore, the gear member 700 can be smoothly rotated.

The protruding pin 730 is formed in a cylindrical shape and arranged at a position eccentric from the gear shaft 790 . In this embodiment, the protruding pin 730 protrudes from the upper surface of the pin receiving portion 722 of the detected portion 720 . Projecting pin 730 is formed at a position where the axis of the cylinder is concentric with pin receiving portion 722 . Therefore, the projecting pin 730 is arranged in a posture parallel to the gear shaft 790 .

A structure for mounting gear body 700 to first base body 410 will be described with reference to FIG. 21(a) is a front view of the first base body 410, and FIG. 21(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first base body 410 taken along line XXIb-XXIb of FIG. 21(a). 21 shows a state in which only the gear member 700 and the rotational position detection sensor S are attached.

As shown in FIG. 21 , a bearing D is provided on the first base body 410 , and a gear shaft 790 is rotatably supported by the bearing D, so that the gear member 700 is mounted on the first base body 410 . It is arranged on the upper surface side. A retaining ring (not shown) is attached to a circumferential groove recessed in the tip of the gear shaft 790 (lower end in FIG. 21(b)). 790 is held on the first base body 410 .

A support rib 411 is erected on the upper surface of the first base body 410 , and the erected tip of the support rib 411 supports the bottom surface of the gear body 710 of the gear member 700 . The support rib 411 extends along an imaginary circle centered on the gear shaft 790 and is formed as a projection having a hemispherical cross section, so that the gear member 700 can be supported with a small rotational resistance.

A recessed portion 412 is formed in the first base body 410 so as to extend along the locus of movement of the pin receiving portion 720 and the flat plate portion 730 of the gear member 700 . A restriction rib 413 is erected on the upper surface of the recessed portion 412, and displacement of the detected portion 720 by a predetermined amount or more (displacement in the direction in which the detected portion 720 approaches the first base body 410, FIG. 21B ) downward displacement).

The restricting rib 413 extends along an imaginary circle centered on the gear shaft 790 (see FIG. 21(a)) and is formed as a ridge with a hemispherical cross section (see FIG. 21(b)). Specifically, the regulating rib 413 is located on an imaginary straight line connecting the axis of the gear shaft 790 and the axis of the projecting pin 730 (pin receiving portion 722), and is connected to the flat plate portion 723. It extends along the locus of movement of the bottom surface of the pin receiving portion 722 (hereinafter referred to as the “regulated portion P1”).

The support ribs 411 of the first base body 410 are in contact with the bottom surface of the gear body 710 of the gear member 700 to support the gear member 700 in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 21(b)). Rib 413 is formed so as to have a gap between it and the bottom surface of detected portion 720 of gear member 700 .

Here, when the gear member 700 is rotationally driven and the projecting pin 730 is moved along the guide groove 511a of the first arm 500 (see FIG. 19), the projecting pin 730 presses against the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a. Inclination occurs in the gear member 700 due to the action of the reaction force on the pin 730 . In particular, the portion to be detected 720 that protrudes radially outward is subject to collapse (bending deformation in a direction approaching the upper surface of the first base member 410).

In this case, according to the present embodiment, the first base body 410 has the regulating rib 413 erected along the locus of movement of the detected portion 720, so that the gear member 700 is tilted (the detected portion 420 is When it falls down), the detected portion 720 can be received by the restricting rib 413 . As a result, excessive inclination of the gear member 700 can be avoided while suppressing an increase in rotational resistance of the gear member 700, and damage to not only the detected portion 720 but also the gear shaft 790 and the tooth surface can be suppressed. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the gear member 700 from rotating in a state in which the tooth surfaces of the gear member 700 and the tooth surface of the reduction gear 800 are misaligned (a state of misalignment), the rotational resistance of the gear member 700 becomes excessive and the tooth surface of the reduction gear 800 is prevented from rotating. Abrasion of the surface can be suppressed.

In addition, excessive tilting of the gear member 700 can be effectively suppressed by arranging the restricting ribs 413 to receive the portion to be detected 720 where the displacement is maximum when the gear member 700 tilts. Further, in this way, the portion for exhibiting the function as the portion to be detected by the rotational position detection sensor S also serves as the portion for exhibiting the stopper function for suppressing the inclination of the gear member 700. , the structure can be simplified and the parts cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the parts for exerting these two functions are separately provided in two places.

As described above, a gap is formed between the standing tip of the regulating rib 413 and the bottom surface of the detected portion 720 of the gear member 700 . Therefore, when the gear member 700 is rotationally driven and the projecting pin 730 is moved along the guide groove 511a of the first arm 500, the reaction force to the projecting pin 730 pressing against the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a is reduced. When the effect is small, the gap between the bottom surface of the detected portion 720 and the upstanding tip of the restricting rib 413 can be maintained to avoid the occurrence of contact resistance. Thereby, the driving force of the driving motor 900 required for rotating the gear member 700 can be reduced.

Here, in the gear member 700, the projecting pin 730 may stand up from the gear main body 710, but in this embodiment, the projecting pin 730 stands up from the detected portion 720, so that the gear member 700 is rotated and the protruding pin 730 is moved along the guide groove 511a, and when the protruding pin 730 receives a reaction force from the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a, only the detected portion 720 is partially moved. By tilting the gear body 710 (gear shaft 790), tilting of the gear body 710 (gear shaft 790) can be easily suppressed. That is, deformation of the gear body 710 can be suppressed by concentrating the deformation on the detected portion 720 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the gear body 710 from rotating with the tooth flanks of the reduction gear 800 deviated from each other, resulting in excessive rotation resistance and wear of the tooth flanks.

On the other hand, the protruding pin 730 is positioned radially inward (left side in FIG. 21(b)) of the restricting rib 413 . That is, the regulating rib 413 (the regulated portion P1) is positioned radially outward (to the right in FIG. 21(b)) of the base of the projecting pin 730 when viewed in the axial direction of the gear shaft 790 of the gear member 700 .

Therefore, when the projecting pin 730 receives a reaction force from the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a, the regulated portion P1 of the detected portion 720 (that is, the portion closest to the first case portion 410 and The portion formed in a cylindrical shape and whose rigidity is ensured when it is received by the restricting rib 413 ) can be received by the restricting rib 413 . As a result, tilting of the gear member 700 can be effectively suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 21(a), the restricting rib 413 has a region beyond the rotational position detection sensor S (that is, the detected portion 720 (flat plate portion 723) of the gear member 700 is detected by the rotational position detection sensor S). When the gear member 700 is rotated while the protruding pin 730 receives a reaction force from the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a, the flat plate portion 723 of the detected portion 720 detects the rotational position. Collision with the sensor S (light receiving portion Sb) can be suppressed. Thereby, the reliability of detection of the rotational position of the gear member 700 can be enhanced.

Returning to FIG. 6 to FIG. 9, description will be made. When the gear member 700 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 7) by the rotational driving force of the driving motor 900 from the state (first position) shown in FIGS. The inner wall surface of 511a is pressed, and the first arm 500 is displaced around the gear shaft 520 (rotated counterclockwise around the gear shaft 520 in FIG. 7). The other end (guide body 630, see FIG. 17(b)) of the second arm 600 is slid downward (downward in FIG. 7) along the guide groove 431, so that the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 is placed in the second position shown in FIGS.

On the other hand, when the gear member 700 is reversely rotated (clockwise in FIG. 9) by the rotational driving force of the driving motor 900 from the state (second position) shown in FIGS. The inner wall surface of the groove 511a is pressed, and the first arm 500 is displaced around the gear shaft 520 (rotated clockwise around the gear shaft 520 in FIG. 7). The other end (guide body 630, see FIG. 17(b)) of the second arm 600 is slid upward (upward in FIG. 9) along the guide groove 431, so that the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 is placed in the first position shown in FIGS.

In this case, according to the present embodiment, the second rotating decorative body 550 rotatably disposed on the first arm 500 has an extension portion 552 of the second rotating decorative body 550 that extends from one end of the second arm 600 . is rotatably supported (see FIG. 17(b)), and the other end of the second arm 600 is slidably coupled along the guide groove 431 of the second base body 430 .

Therefore, when the first arm 500 is displaced with respect to the case member 400, the angle formed by the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 (that is, when one end of the second arm 600 is A straight line connecting the arm shaft 520 and the connection position (the position supported by the shaft support hole 552a and the connection pin 621; see FIGS. 11 and 17) and the above-mentioned connection position (the position supported by the shaft support hole 552a and the connection pin 621). angle formed by a straight line that connects the other end of the second arm 600 (guide body 630, see FIG. 17) to the second case body 630 (guide shaft 631). Accordingly, the second rotary decoration 550 can be relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to the first arm 500 .

Accordingly, the driving motor 900 that applies the driving force to the first arm 500 not only serves as a driving source for displacing the first arm 500 around the arm shaft 520, but also serves as a driving source for the second rotating decorative body 550. It can also serve as a drive source for relatively moving (rotating) with respect to one arm 500 . This eliminates the need to separately provide a drive motor only for rotating the second rotary decorative body 550 .

In this case, the first arm 500 is provided with the first rotary decoration 540 coaxially with the second rotary decoration 550, and the first rotary decoration 540 can be rotated independently by the rotation mechanism 530. It is formed. Therefore, the first decorative portion 543 and the second decorative portion 553 of the first rotary decoration body 540 and the second rotary decoration pair 550 are independently rotated on the same axis, and the first arm 500 is displaced. The game area can be moved linearly or curvedly, and as a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the first rotating decorative body 540 (first decorative portion 543) and the second rotating decorative pair 550 (second decorative portion 553) are set to rotate in the same direction and rotate in different directions. set to speed. As a result, the first rotary decoration body 540 (the first decoration portion 543) and the second rotary decoration pair 550 (the second decoration portion 553) are rotated at the same time as the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced. In this case, it is possible to give the player the impression that both of them rotate smoothly, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Here, the relative displacement (rotation) between the second rotating decorative body 550 and the first arm 500 is achievable. In this case, the present embodiment adopts a configuration in which the other end of the second arm 600 is slidably connected to the second base body 430 through the guide groove 431 of the second base pair 430 . As a result, compared to a configuration in which the other end of the second arm 600 is rotatably supported by the second base body 430, the displaceable amount of the first arm 500 can be increased. As the displacement amount of the first arm 500 increases, the rotation amount of the second rotary decoration 550 (second decoration portion 553) can also be increased. As a result, not only the presentation effect by the displacement of the first arm 500 itself, but also the presentation effect by the rotation of the second decorative portion 553 accompanying the displacement can be further enhanced.

When the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are in the first position shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the collar C2 positioned closer to the fixed decorative body 620 out of the pair of collars C2 is the first arm as described above. 2 It abuts on the upper end (upper side in FIG. 7) of the guide groove 431 of the base body 430, and further movement is restricted. In this case, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are also part of the outer surface of the arc-curved portion of the swing-side main body 512 of the first arm 500 (hereinafter referred to as "first position arm regulated portion P2"). ) is brought into contact with the notch end face of the outer wall of the first base body 410 (hereinafter referred to as "first position base restricted portion P3"), further movement is also restricted.

Further, in the second position shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are arranged such that the collar C2, which is located on the opposite side of the fixed decorative body 620 among the pair of collars C2, is positioned as described above. , the lower end (lower side in FIG. 9) of the guide groove 431 of the second base body 430, and further movement thereof is restricted. In this case, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are further connected to a portion of the outer peripheral surface of the container 513 of the first arm 500 (hereinafter referred to as "second position arm restricted portion P4", FIG. 10B). or see FIG. 11(b)) is in contact with the inner corner portion of the outer wall of the second base body 430 (hereinafter referred to as the "second position base regulated portion P5"; see FIGS. 6 and 7), A part of the main body member 610 of the second arm 600 (hereinafter referred to as “second position arm restricted portion P6”) is the inner surface of the outer wall of the second base body 430 (hereinafter referred to as “second position base restricted portion P7”). ) also restricts further movement.

Here, a structure for holding the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 arranged at the first position and the second position will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 25. FIG.

FIG. 22(a) is a front view of the first arm 500, the second arm 600, and the gear member 700 arranged at the first position, and FIG. 1 is a partially enlarged front view of 1 arm 500 and gear member 700. FIG. 23(a) is a front view of the first arm 500, the second arm 600, and the gear member 700 in a state in which the gear member 700 is rotated in the reverse direction from the state shown in FIG. 22(a), and FIG. 23(b). 23(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the first arm 500 and the gear member 700 at the XXIIIb portion of FIG. 23(a). FIG.

As shown in FIG. 22, in this embodiment, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 approach the first position from the predetermined position (that is, the gear member 700 rotates in the reverse direction (clockwise in FIG. 22(b)). 22), a straight line L1 connecting the axis of projecting pin 730 and the axis of arm shaft 520 and a line L2 connecting the axis of projecting pin 730 and the axis of gear shaft 790 The angle θ to form becomes large.

Therefore, when an external force acts on the first arm 500 and the external force is transmitted from the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a to the projecting pin 730 (gear member 700), the first arm 500 is close to the first position. As the state increases, the force component of the force generated in the gear member 700 in the direction to rotate the gear member 700 (that is, the force in the direction perpendicular to the straight line L2 connecting the axis of the protruding pin 730 and the axis of the gear shaft 790 increases). component) can be reduced. As a result, when holding the first arm 500 at the first position, the driving force required for the drive motor 900 to counteract the external force (for example, gravity) acting on the first arm 500 can be reduced. , the capacity of the drive motor 900 can be reduced and the energy consumption can be reduced accordingly.

Here, when starting to displace the first arm 500 in a stopped state, the load on the drive motor 900 increases due to the influence of inertia force and static friction force.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the first arm 500 is stopped (that is, the first position shown in FIG. 22), the straight line L1 connecting the axial center of the projecting pin 730 and the axial center of the arm shaft 520 and , the angle θ formed by the straight line L2 connecting the axis of the projecting pin 730 and the axis of the gear shaft 790 is large (that is, the reduction ratio is large). When starting (that is, rotating the gear member 700 forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 22B) from the state shown in FIG. 22), the load on the drive motor 900 can be reduced. Therefore, the capacity of the drive motor 900 can be reduced.

On the other hand, since the reduction ratio can be increased as described above, when the first arm 500 reaches the first position, even if the rotation speed of the gear member 700 is kept constant, the displacement speed of the first arm 500 is reduced. can be slowed down. Therefore, the impact generated when reaching the first position (in particular, the collision between the first position arm regulated portion P2 and the first position base regulated portion P3 and the collision of the collar C2 with the upper end of the guide groove 431) impact) can be suppressed, and durability can be improved.

The "predetermined position" when "the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 approach the first position from the predetermined position" is a straight line connecting the axis of the projecting pin 730 and the axis of the gear shaft 790. It means a state where the axis of the gear shaft 790 is positioned on L2 (that is, a state where the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 overlap).

As shown in FIG. 22, in this embodiment, when the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are arranged at the first position, the gear member 700 rotates in the reverse direction (FIG. 22(b)) in the guide groove 511a. clockwise rotation, rotation in the first direction) to form an area for the projecting pin 730 to move further.

Therefore, the gear member 700 is reversely rotated (rotated in the first direction) as shown in FIG. 23 from the state shown in FIG. 22 (where the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are arranged at the first position). , the projecting pin 730 is moved along the guide groove 511a, thereby moving the first position arm regulated portion P2 to the first position base regulated portion P3 and the collar C2 to the upper end of the guide groove 431, respectively. and can absorb the gap between the arm shaft 520 and its bearing, the gap between the projecting pin 730 and the guide groove 511a, and the like. That is, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 can be pushed from the second position toward the first position (leftward in FIG. 23(a)). As a result, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 can be firmly held at the first position by suppressing rattling.

As shown in FIG. 23, in this embodiment, after the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are arranged at the first position shown in FIG. 520 and a straight line L2 connecting the axial centers of the projecting pin 730 and the gear shaft 790 are perpendicular to each other (that is, the angle θ=90 degrees).

Therefore, even if an external force acts on the first arm 500 , the force component in the direction to rotate the gear member 700 (that is, the force component) is not generated, and the rotation of the gear member 700 can be restricted. As a result, since the first arm 500 can be mechanically maintained at the first position, the driving force of the drive motor 900 can be reduced (or released). As a result, the capacity of the drive motor 900 can be reduced and the energy consumption can be suppressed.

FIG. 24(a) is a front view of the first arm 500, the second arm 600, and the gear member 700 arranged at the second position, and FIG. 1 is a partially enlarged front view of 1 arm 500 and gear member 700. FIG. 25(a) is a front view of the first arm 500, the second arm 600, and the gear member 700 in a state in which the gear member 700 has been rotated forward from the state shown in FIG. 24(a), and FIG. 25(b). 25(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the first arm 500 and the gear member 700 at the XXVb portion of FIG. 25(a). FIG.

According to the present embodiment, even in the second position shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the same effect as in the case of the first position shown in FIGS. 22 and 23 can be obtained.

That is, as shown in FIG. 24, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 approach the second position from the predetermined position (that is, the gear member 700 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 24(b)) and ), the angle θ formed by the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 increases.

Therefore, even if an external force acts on the first arm 500, the closer the first arm 500 is to the second position, the smaller the force component in the direction of rotating the gear member 700 (the force component in the direction perpendicular to the straight line 2). can. As a result, the driving force required to hold the first arm 500 at the second position can be reduced, so that the capacity of the drive motor 900 can be reduced and the energy consumption can be reduced accordingly.

At the second position shown in FIG. 24, as in the case of the first position, the angle θ between the straight lines L1 and L2 is large (that is, the reduction ratio is large). The load required to start displacing the arm 500 (that is, rotate the gear member 700 in the reverse direction (clockwise in FIG. 22(b)) from the state shown in FIG. 24) is reduced, and the drive motor 900 can be reduced in size. In addition, by increasing the speed reduction ratio, the impact when reaching the second position (in particular, the collision between the second position arm regulated portions P4 and P6 and the second position base regulated portions P5 and P7, and It is possible to suppress the impact caused by the collision of the collar C2 against the lower end of the guide groove 431, thereby improving the durability.

Note that the "predetermined position" when "the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 approach the second position from the predetermined position" mentioned above means the axial center of the protruding pin 730 and the gear shaft, as in the case described above. It means a state where the axis of the gear shaft 790 is located on the straight line L2 connecting the axes of the gear shaft 790 (that is, the state where the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 overlap).

As shown in FIG. 24, in the present embodiment, when the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are arranged at the second position, the gear member 700 rotates forward (FIG. 24(b)) in the guide groove 511a. counterclockwise rotation, rotation in a second direction) to form an area for the projecting pin 730 to move further.

Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 24 (where the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are arranged at the second position), the gear member 700 is rotated forward (rotated in the second direction) as shown in FIG. , the projecting pin 730 is moved along the guide groove 511a to move the second position arm restricted portions P4 and P6 to the second position base restricted portions P5 and P7, respectively, and the collar C2 to the lower end of the guide groove 431. In addition, they can absorb the gap between the arm shaft 520 and its bearing, the gap between the projecting pin 730 and the guide groove 511a, and the like. That is, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 can be pushed from the first position to the second position (rightward in FIG. 25(a)). As a result, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 can be firmly held at the second position by suppressing rattling.

As shown in FIG. 25, in this embodiment, after the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are arranged at the second position shown in FIG. , angle θ=90 degrees). Therefore, even if an external force acts on the first arm 500, the force component in the direction to rotate the gear member 700 (the force component in the direction orthogonal to the straight line L2) is not generated, and the rotation of the gear member 700 can be restricted. can. As a result, since the first arm 500 can be mechanically maintained at the second position, the driving force of the drive motor 900 can be reduced (or released). As a result, the capacity of the drive motor 900 can be reduced and the energy consumption can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, since the guide groove 511a extends linearly, after the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are arranged at the first position shown in FIG. When (rotated in the first direction) and brought into the state of FIG. 23, the projecting pin 730 can be gradually pressed against the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a. That is, the first position arm regulated portion P2 is pressed against the first position base regulated portion P3, and the collar C2 is pressed against the upper end of the guide groove 431, and the gap between the arm shaft 520 and its bearing, and the protrusion. The operation of absorbing the gap between the pin 730 and the guide groove 511a can be gradually progressed. Thereby, breakage of each part can be suppressed. 24, the gear member 700 is further rotated in the forward direction (rotated in the second direction), and the state shown in FIG. 25 is obtained. The parts P4 and P6 are pushed against the second position base regulated parts P5 and P7, and the collar C2 is pushed against the lower end of the guide groove 431, the gap between the arm shaft 520 and its bearing, the projecting pin 730 and the guide. The action of absorbing the gap with respect to the groove 511a can be gradually progressed, thereby suppressing the breakage of each part.

Returning to FIG. 6 to FIG. 9, description will be made. As shown in FIG. 7, in the state where the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are arranged at the first position, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are connected to the first rotary ornament 540 and the second rotary The decorative body 550 and the fixed decorative body 620 are positioned outside the edge 433 of the second base body 430 (left side in FIG. 7), and as shown in FIG. In the second position, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 move the first rotating decorative body 540 and the second rotating decorative body 550 and the fixed decorative body 620 to the storage surface of the second base body 430 . 432.

Therefore, when the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced from the first position to the second position, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 pass through the edge 433 of the second base body 430. . In this case, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are each formed in an elongated shape, and the heavy object (the first arm 600) is placed at the position furthest apart from the fulcrum (arm shaft 520 and guide body 630) of the elongated bodies. rotating ornament 540, rotating mechanism 530, etc.) are provided. Therefore, when the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced from the first position to the second position, they tend to sway in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the game board 13). may collide with the edge 433 of the second base body 430 to cause damage, or may be locked by the edge 433 of the second base body 430 and become unable to be displaced.

It is conceivable to prevent the edge 433 of the second base body 430 from being positioned on the displacement trajectory of the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 . However, enlarging the second base body 430 over the entire displacement area of the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 (that is, extending the position of the edge 433 leftward in FIGS. 7 and 9) is Since the display area of the pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is hidden by the second base body 430 (flat storage surface portion 432), this cannot be done. And retracting the second arm 600 outside the displacement trajectory (that is, retracting the position of the edge portion 433 to the right in FIGS. 7 and 9) is to move the second base body 430 (storage surface portion 432) to the back side. This cannot be done because the wiring and substrates arranged in the inner layer are exposed and the appearance is spoiled. Here, a detailed configuration of the second base body 430 will be described with reference to FIG. 26 .

26(a) is a front view of the second base body 430, and FIG. 26(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second base body 430 taken along line XXVIb-XXVIb of FIG. 26(a). As shown in FIG. 26, when the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced from the first position to the second position, the second base body 430 has at least the first rotating decorative body 540 and the second rotating decorative body. 55 and the fixed decorative body 620, and includes an edge portion 433 formed along the outer edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2). 433 is curved to have an arcuate cross section.

As shown in FIG. 26(b), the edge portion 433 has a larger thickness dimension (vertical dimension in FIG. 26(b)) than the accommodation surface portion 432, and the entire thickness direction thereof is curved in an arcuate cross-section. formed by

As a result, while the opening for exposing the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is secured in the game area (game board 13), when the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced from the first position to the second position, In addition, even if the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 swayed in the front-rear direction collide with the edge 433 of the second base body 430, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are retracted due to the arc-shaped cross section. It can be guided toward the surface portion 432 to absorb the impact. Therefore, damage can be suppressed, and the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 can be prevented from being locked and stopped by the edge 433 of the second base body 430, and can be smoothly displaced.

Here, as shown in FIG. 26(a), the edge portion 433 has an outer edge (the left end in FIG. 26(a)) formed in a waveform shape in which a plurality of circular arc shapes are combined when viewed from the front. The surface (the front side of FIG. 26(a) on the paper surface) is also formed into a wave shape in which a plurality of circular arc shapes are combined. In this way, by applying a decorative shape to the outer edge and surface of the edge portion 433, even in the case where the edge portion 433 is formed to have a relatively large diameter and an arcuate cross section as in the present embodiment. Even if there is, it is possible to allow the player to recognize the arc-shaped cross-section and the decorative shape as an integrated design, and to prevent the edge 433 from being unnaturally conspicuous.

Further, the second base body 430 is made of a light-transmitting material, and the storage surface portion 432 on which the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced has a flat front surface. A continuous ornamental shape similar to edge 433 is formed on the back (see FIG. 27).

As a result, when the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced on the front side (flat surface side) of the storage surface portion 432, the displacement of the first arm 500 and the like is suppressed from being hindered, and the movement is smoothly performed. can be displaced. On the other hand, since the storage surface portion 432 is made of a light-transmitting material and the decorative shape is formed on the back surface thereof, the edge portion 433 and the decorative shape on the back surface of the storage surface portion 432 are integrated into a design, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. It is possible to secure the above-mentioned effect of making the user recognize the image without any problem.

In addition, when the front surface of the storage surface portion 432 is formed as a flat surface, the flat surface (front surface) is likely to be scratched due to sliding of the first arm 500 and the second arm 600. By forming the decorative shape on the front surface, the scratches on the front surface and the decorative shape on the back surface can be overlapped to make the scratches on the front surface inconspicuous.

Next, the structure of case member 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG. 27 is an exploded rear perspective view of the case member 400. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 27, the case member 400 includes a first base body 410 (see FIGS. 7 and 9) on which a first arm 500, a gear member 700, a reduction gear 800 and a drive motor 900 are arranged, A second base body 430 detachably connected to the first base body 410 is provided, and a housing surface portion 432 and an edge portion 433 of the second base body 430 are decorated. As a result, the case member 400 can be efficiently used for other models.

That is, along with a change in the displacement form (for example, displacement angle or displacement speed) of the first arm 500, the arrangement position of the arm shaft 520 of the first arm 500 may be changed, or the number of teeth of the reduction gear 800 or the pinion gear 920 may be changed. If it is necessary to change the arrangement position thereof in order to increase or decrease the (reduction ratio), the entire case member 400 can be is useless to change . Similarly, when it becomes necessary to change the decorative shape of the housing surface portion 432 and the edge portion 433, it is necessary to change the arrangement position of the arm shaft 520 of the first arm 500 and the arrangement position of the reduction gear 800 and the like. If there is not, changing the entire case member 400 is useless.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the case member 400 includes a first base body 410 in which members related to driving such as the first arm 500 and the drive motor 900 are arranged, and a housing surface portion 432, an edge portion 433 and the like. Since it is divided into two members, the second base body 430 and the second base body 430 on which parts related to decoration are arranged, only one of the first base body 410 or the second base body 430 is changed according to the contents of the change, and the first base body 410 is changed. Since the other of the body 410 or the second base body 430 can be used as it is, the case member 400 can be efficiently used for other models.

Here, since the other end of the second arm 600 is displaceably arranged on the second base body 430, when the other end of the second arm 600 is displaceably arranged on the first base body 410, , the distance between the arm shaft 520 of the first arm 500 and the other end (the guide body 630) of the second arm 600 can be increased (separated). As a result, the displaceable amount of the first arm 500 can be increased, and the presentation effect by displacing the first arm 500 can be enhanced.

The relationship between the second arm 600 and the case member 400 (second base body 430) is sufficient if the other end of the second arm 600 is connected so as to be displaceable. (driving motor 900, reduction gear 800, gear member 700, etc.) is changed, or even if second arm 600 is changed in addition to this, second base body 430 can be used as it is, relatively easily. Therefore, by adopting the configuration in which the other end of the second arm 600 is connected to the second base body 430 instead of the first base body 410, the case member 400 can be efficiently used for other models. , and an increase in the amount of displacement of the first arm 500 can be achieved.

Next, the details of the connecting structure between the first base body 410 and the second base body 430 will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, the first base body 410 has a flat back surface, which is a region where the second base body 430 and the back plate member 450 are connected. A pair of first protrusions 416 and a pair of second protrusions 417 are provided.

The seat surface wall 415 is a part for forming the seat surface of the back plate member 450, and extends linearly in the vertical and horizontal directions as a ridge having a rectangular cross section. The inner wall surface of the portion extending in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 27) of the seat surface wall 415 functions as a portion for positioning the second base body 430 . That is, the distance from the inner wall surface of the longitudinally extending portion of the seat wall 415 to the first projection 416 is the same as the distance from one side surface (the left side surface in FIG. 27) of the projecting plate portion 434 to the positioning hole 434a. It is said that Therefore, by bringing the side surface of the projecting plate portion 434 into contact with the inner wall surface of the seat surface wall 415, both can be positioned in the lateral direction.

The height position of the protruding end face of the seat wall 415 is at the same height position as the protruding end faces of the first projection 416 and the second projection 417 (the seat projection 417a and the connecting wall 417c, see FIG. 28). are set (that is, the protruding tip surfaces of the respective portions 415 to 417 are arranged flush), and the front surface of the rear plate member 450 is seated on the protruding tip surfaces of the respective portions 415 to 417 .

The first protrusion 416 is a part for positioning the second base body 430 (projection plate portion 434) with respect to the first base body 410 and for forming the seat surface of the rear plate member 450. It is formed in a columnar shape, and a female screw (not shown) that can be tightened by a fastening screw (not shown) is recessed in the projecting tip surface of the columnar body. The second base body 430 is positioned with respect to the first base body 410 by inserting the pair of first projections 416 into the positioning holes 434 a of the projecting plate portion 434 . In this case, the thickness dimension of the projecting plate portion 434 is set to a dimension equal to or slightly smaller than the projecting height dimension of the first projection 416, so that the projecting end face of the first projection 416 also has a rear plate member. The front of the 450 is seated.

The second protrusions 417 are portions for positioning the back plate member 450 with respect to the first base body 410 and for forming the seating surface of the back plate member 450, and a pair of the second protrusions 417 are provided. Here, the second projection 417 will be described with reference to FIG. 28 .

28(a) is a partially enlarged rear view of the second protrusion 417, and FIG. 28(b) is a side view of the second protrusion 417 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXVIIIb in FIG. 28(a). c) is a cross-sectional view of the second projection 417 taken along line XXVIIIc-XXVIIIc of FIG. 28(a).

As shown in FIG. 28, the second projection 417 includes a bearing surface projection 417a formed in a cylindrical shape with a circular cross section, and a positioning projection 417b formed in a cylindrical shape with a circular cross section smaller in diameter than the bearing surface projection 417a. , and a connection wall 417c having a rectangular cross section that connects the outer peripheral surfaces of the bearing surface projection 417a and the positioning projection 417b.

The seat surface projection 417a and the connecting wall 417c are set to have the same projection height dimension, and the projection height dimension is set to be the same as the projection height dimension of the seat surface wall 415 and the first projection 416. be. That is, the second protrusion 417 has the front surface of the back plate member 450 seated on the protruding end surface of the seat surface protrusion 417a and the connecting wall 417c. A female screw (not shown) to which a fastening screw (not shown) can be fastened is recessed in the projecting tip surface of the bearing surface projection 417a.

The positioning projection 417 b has a projection height dimension larger than that of the seat surface projection 417 a and the connecting wall 417 c , and can be inserted into the positioning hole 452 of the back plate member 450 . The pair of positioning protrusions 417 b (see FIG. 27 ) are inserted into the positioning holes 452 of the rear plate member 450 to position the rear plate member 450 with respect to the first base body 410 .

The connecting wall 417c linearly connects the bearing surface projection 417a and the positioning projection 417b at the shortest distance. Here, while the bearing surface projection 417a and the positioning projection 417b have a relatively small diameter, the height of the projection is large. and vibration after installation, the bearing surface projection 417a and the positioning projection 417b are connected by the connecting wall 417c, thereby increasing the rigidity of the second projection 417 as a whole and preventing the damage. can be suppressed.

Further, by setting the projection height dimension of the connecting wall 417c to be the same as the projection height dimension of the seat surface projection 417a, the seat surface projection 417a and the positioning projection 417b are connected to the connection wall 417c to form the second In addition to the role of increasing the strength of the protrusion 417 as a whole, it can also serve as a seat surface on which the front surface of the back plate member 450 is seated. Therefore, the material cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the members for each role are provided separately.

Returning to FIG. 27, description will be made. A seat surface wall 425 , a first projection 426 and a second projection 427 are provided on the second base body 430 below the projecting plate portion 434 so as to protrude toward the back side. Note that the seat wall 425 is configured in the same manner as the seat wall 415 of the first base body 410 except that the arrangement position and extension length are different, and the first protrusion 426 and the second protrusion 427 are arranged in the same manner as the seat wall 415 . It is configured in the same manner as the first protrusion 416 and the second protrusion 417 of the first base body 410 except that the installation positions are different. Therefore, the description of the seat wall 425, the first protrusion 426 and the second protrusion 427 is omitted.

A projecting plate portion 434 is provided on the second base body 430 so as to protrude toward the first base body 410 from the side surface (upper side surface in FIG. 27 ) of the second base body 430 connected to the first base body 410 . The projecting plate portion 434 is a portion that is superimposed on and connected to the back surface of the first base body 410, and is formed in a rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front. A pair of positioning holes 434a, which are circular holes when viewed from the front, are formed through the protruding plate portion 434 along the plate thickness direction. is projected.

The second base body 430 is positioned with respect to the first base body 410 by inserting the first protrusions 416 of the first base body 410 into the pair of positioning holes 434 a of the projecting plate portion 434 . In this case, the thickness dimension of the protruding plate portion 434 is set to a dimension equivalent to the protruding height dimension of the bearing surface wall 415 of the first base body 410, the first projection 416, and the like. The front side of the back plate member 450 is seated.

The rear surface of the protruding plate portion 434 has the same height position as the projecting tip surfaces of the seat surface wall 425, the first projection 426 and the second projection 427 (the seat surface projection 417a and the connecting wall 417c, see FIG. 28). It is set at a height position (that is, a height position where the rear surface of the protruding plate portion 434 and the protruding end surface of the seat surface wall 425 or the like are flush with each other). Therefore, the front surface of the back plate member 450 is seated on the back surface of the projecting portion 434 and the projecting tip surfaces of the portions 425-427.

The back plate member 450 is a member that is attached (fastened and fixed) to the back sides of the first base body 410 and the second base body 430 in order to connect the first base body 410 and the second base body 430 . , is formed in a plate shape from a metal material. Note that the rear plate member 450 has a square shape in a front view in a portion attached to the first base body 410 and a portion attached to the first base body 410 in a portion attached to the second base body 430 . Each is formed in an elongated rectangular shape with a narrower width than the .

Both sides of the back plate member 450 along the direction connecting the first base member 410 and the second base member 430 (vertical direction in FIG. 27) are bent toward the back side, thereby separating the first base member 410 and the second base member 430 from each other. The bending rigidity in the bending direction centering on the connecting portion (near the projecting plate portion 434) with 430 is enhanced. Thereby, the connection strength of the first base body 410 and the second base body 430 can be secured.

An insertion hole 451 and a positioning hole 452 are formed through the rear plate member 450 in the plate thickness direction. The insertion hole 451 is a circular cross-sectional hole through which a fastening screw (not shown) can be inserted and has an inner diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the protruding tip surfaces of the first projections 416 and 426, and corresponds to the first projections 416 and 426. formed in each position. The positioning holes 452 are holes having a circular cross-section with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameters of the positioning protrusions 417b and 434b, and are formed at positions corresponding to the positioning protrusions 417b and 434b, respectively.

To assemble the case member 400 formed as described above, first, the projecting plate portion 434 of the second base body 430 is superimposed on the lower portion (flat surface portion) of the back surface of the first base body 410 . In this case, as described above, the projecting plate portion 434 of the second base body 430 is attached to the inner wall surface of the portion of the seat wall 415 of the first base body 410 that extends in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 27). By abutting one side surface (the left side surface in FIG. 27), both can be laterally positioned. This allows the first protrusion 416 to be easily inserted into the positioning hole 434a.

Next, the rear plate member 450 is overlaid on the rear surfaces of the first base body 410 and the second base body 430 and fastened and fixed with fastening screws (not shown). That is, a plurality of (two in this embodiment) positioning projections 417b on the first base body 410 side and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) positioning projections 417b and 434b on the second base body 430 side are positioned. By inserting each through the hole 452 , the positions of the first protrusions 416 , 426 and the second protrusions 417 , 427 and the insertion hole 451 are matched. , 426 and the second projections 417, 427, respectively. As a result, the rear plate member 450 is fastened and fixed to the rear surfaces of the first base body 410 and the second base body 430, and the assembly of the case member 400 is completed.

In this way, the case member 400 is connected by the metal back plate member 450 to which the first base member 410 and the second base member 430 are attached on the back side thereof. By making the connection of the two base bodies 430 strong, the rigidity of the case member 400 as a whole can be ensured.

In this assembled state, the projecting plate portion 434 formed on the second base member 430 is sandwiched between the rear surface of the first base member 410 and the front surface of the rear plate member 450, so that the case member 400 is shaped like a plate. By utilizing the overlap of bodies, the rigidity of the case member 400 as a whole can be effectively increased while achieving simplification and miniaturization of the structure.

The back plate member 450 is attached to the first base body 410 (square-shaped part in front view), and fastening screws are fastened to the four corners of the square, and the back plate member 450 is attached to the second base body 430 . Since fastening screws are fastened to both ends in the longitudinal direction of the portion (the elongated portion that extends vertically), the rigidity of the back plate member 450 is efficiently utilized, and the case member 400 (the first The rigidity of the base body 410 and the second base body 430) can be increased.

Note that the case member 400 is assembled by first attaching (fastening and fixing) the rear plate member 450 to the rear surface of the second base body 430, and then fastening and fixing the second base body 430 and the rear plate member 450 together. 1 It may be attached (fastened and fixed) to the base body 410 .

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 29(a) and 29(b). FIG. 29(a) is a front view of the shaft body 2542 and the retaining ring 2534 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 29(b) shows the shaft body 2542 and the retaining ring 2534 along line XXIXb-XXIXb of FIG. 29(a). is a cross-sectional view of.

In the first embodiment, the arc-shaped protruding tip of the protruding portion 534c of the retaining ring 534 presses (closely contacts) the bottom surface of the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft 542, so that the retaining ring 534 is attached to the shaft 542. In the second embodiment, the shaft body 2542 is formed with an engaged portion 2542d that engages with the retaining ring 2534 in the circumferential direction. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the part same as 1st Embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 29(a) and 29(b), the shaft body 2542 has an engaged portion 2542d recessed in the bottom surface of the circumferential groove 542c. The engaged portion 2542d is a concave portion for receiving the overhanging portion 2534c of the retaining ring 2534, and is positioned 180 degrees out of phase with the flat surface 542a (that is, the flat surfaces 533a and 533e1 of the wheel gear 533 are provided with the shaft body 2542d). When the flat surface 542a of 542 is engaged (see FIG. 15(a)), it is recessed at a position opposite to the protrusion 533e (lower side in FIG. 29(b)).

The retaining ring 2534 includes projecting portions 534c, 2534c that project radially inward from three circumferential locations on the inner peripheral side of the annular portion 534b. In this embodiment, the protruding portion 2534c located on the side that is 180 degrees out of phase with the opening end 534a (that is, positioned between the pair of protruding portions 534c located on the side of the opening end 534a) The inward projection dimension is set to be larger than the radially inward projection dimension of the projecting portion 534c located on the open end 534a side.

According to this embodiment, when the retaining ring 2534 is fitted into the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 2542 to the appropriate position, as shown in FIG. can be received in the engaged portion 2542d. That is, the shaft body 2542 is stopped by engaging the one projecting portion 2534c of the retaining ring 2534 with the engaged portion 2542d formed as a concave portion in the bottom surface of the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 2542. The wheels 2534 can be circumferentially engaged.

As a result, the circumferential movement of the snap ring 2534 relative to the shaft 2542 can be restricted, so that the snap ring 2534 can be reliably rotated together with the shaft 2542 . That is, since it is possible to prevent the retaining ring 2534 from slipping on the shaft 2542 in the circumferential direction, even a large rotational torque can be reliably transferred from the shaft 2542 to the protrusion 533e via the retaining ring 2534. can be transmitted.

As a result, the rotational torque transmitted between the wheel gear 533 and the shaft 2542 is received not only between the flat surfaces 533a, 533e1 of the wheel gear 533 and the flat surface 542a of the shaft 2542, but the wheel It can also be supported between the protrusion 533 of the gear 533 and the open end 534a of the retaining ring 2534 (see FIG. 15(b)). As a result, the rotational torque can be distributed, and the durability of the shaft 2542 and the wheel gear 533 can be improved accordingly.

In this case, the engaged portion 2542d of the shaft 2542 is arranged at a position 180 degrees out of phase with the flat surface 542a. When the flat surface 542a of the shaft 542 is engaged with 533a and 533e1 (see FIG. 15A), the engaged portion 2542d is arranged at a position 180 degrees out of phase with the projecting portion 533e (that is, , the opening of the engaged portion 2542d faces the side opposite to the protrusion 533e).

Therefore, the fitting direction of the retaining ring 2534 for positioning the projection 533e between the opening end 534a of the retaining ring 2534 (see FIGS. 15(a) and 15(b)) and the projecting portion 2534c of the retaining ring 2534 can be aligned with the fitting direction of the snap ring 2534 for engaging (accepting) the engaged portion 2542 d of the shaft 2542 . As a result, the projecting portion 533e and the snap ring 2534 are locked by the respective arms of the needle nose pliers, and only by fitting the snap ring 2534 into the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 2542, the snap ring 2534 protrudes. The portion 2534c can be easily and reliably engaged with the engaged portion 2542d of the shaft 2542 .

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 29(c) and 29(d). FIG. 29(c) is a front view of the shaft body 3542 and the retaining ring 3534 in the third embodiment, and FIG. is a cross-sectional view of.

In the second embodiment, the engaged portion 2542d is formed as a concave portion, but in the third embodiment, the engaged portion 3542d is formed as a flat surface. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 29(c) and 29(d), the shaft body 3542 is formed with an engaged portion 3542d on the bottom surface of the circumferential groove 542c. The engaged portion 3542d is formed as a flat surface parallel to the flat surface 542a and is positioned 180 degrees out of phase with the flat surface 542a (that is, the flat surfaces 533a and 533e1 of the wheel gear 533 are connected to the shaft 542). When the flat surface 542a of is engaged (see FIG. 15(a)), it is formed on the opposite side of the protrusion 533e (lower side in FIG. 29(d)).

The retaining ring 3534 includes protruding portions 534c, 3534c that protrude radially inward from three circumferential locations on the inner peripheral side of the annular portion 534b. In this embodiment, the protruding portion 3534c located on the side that is 180 degrees out of phase with the opening end 534a (that is, positioned between the pair of protruding portions 534c located on the side of the opening end 534a) The inward projection dimension is set to be larger than the radial inward projection dimension of the projecting portion 534c located on the side of the opening end 534a, and the projecting tip extends in the axial direction (FIG. 29(d) paper surface). vertical).

According to this embodiment, as in the case of the second embodiment, the engaging portion 3542d of the shaft body 3542 and the overhanging portion 3534c of the retaining ring 3534 are engaged with each other so that the retaining ring 3534 is engaged with the shaft body 3542. can be circumferentially engaged. This prevents the snap ring 3534 from slipping on the shaft 3542 in the circumferential direction, and even a large rotational torque is transferred from the shaft 3542 through the snap ring 334 to the protrusion 533e (Fig. 15(b)). As a result, the rotational torque is applied not only between the flat surfaces 533a, 533e1 of the wheel gear 533 and the flat surface 542a of the shaft body 3542, but also between the protrusion 533 of the wheel gear 533 and the open end 534a of the retaining ring 3534. Since it can take charge, the rotational torque can be distributed, and the durability of the shaft body 3542 and the wheel gear 533 can be improved accordingly.

In addition, since the engaged portion 3542d of the shaft 3542 is disposed at a position 180 degrees out of phase with the flat surface 542a, the projection 533e and the snap ring 3534 are connected as in the case of the second embodiment. are engaged with the respective arms of the needle nose pliers, and the overhanging portion 2534c of the retaining ring 3534 is engaged with the engaged portion of the shaft 3542 simply by fitting the retaining ring 3534 into the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft 3542. 3542d can be easily and reliably engaged.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured by omitting a part of the configuration in each embodiment, or a part of the configuration in each embodiment may be replaced with one in another embodiment or modification. The pachinko machine 10 may be configured by combining with or replacing the configuration of the units.

In each of the above embodiments, the guide groove 511a is formed in the body member 510 of the first arm 500, and the protruding pin 730 inserted into the guide groove 511a protrudes from the gear member 700. However, this is not necessarily the case. Alternatively, a projecting pin may be projected from the body member 510 of the first arm 500 and a guide groove 511a through which the projecting pin is inserted may be formed in the gear member 700 .

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

A game machine comprising an arm member that is displaced about an arm axis and a driving means that generates a driving force for displacing the arm member about the arm axis, wherein the driving force is applied from the driving means. a gear member that rotates around a gear shaft by means of a gear member; the gear member includes a protruding pin that protrudes at a position that is eccentric with respect to the gear shaft; A guide groove for receiving a setting pin is provided, and when the gear member is rotated in the first direction and the projecting pin is moved along the guide groove, the arm member is arranged at the first position and the projecting pin is moved. An angle between a straight line connecting the axial center of the setting pin and the arm axis and a straight line connecting the axial center of the projecting pin and the gear axis increases as the arm member approaches the first position from a predetermined position. Gaming machine A1.

According to the gaming machine A1, as the arm member approaches the first position from the predetermined position, the angle formed between the straight line connecting the axis of the projecting pin and the arm axis and the line connecting the axis of the projecting pin and the gear axis. becomes larger. Therefore, when an external force acts on the arm member and the external force is transmitted to the gear member, the closer the arm member is to the first position, the more the direction of the force generated in the gear member to rotate the gear member. A force component (that is, a force component in a direction orthogonal to a straight line connecting the axial center of the projecting pin and the gear shaft) can be reduced. As a result, when the arm member is held at the first position, the driving force required for the driving means to counteract the external force (for example, gravity) acting on the arm member can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the capacity of the means and suppress the energy consumption.

Further, when starting to displace the arm member held at the first position, the load on the driving means increases due to the influence of inertia force and frictional force. Since the angle between the straight line connecting the axial center of the mounting pin and the arm shaft and the straight line connecting the axial center of the projecting pin and the gear shaft is large (that is, the reduction ratio is large), the arm member can be moved from the first position. By reducing the load on the driving means when starting the displacement, the capacity of the driving means can be reduced. On the other hand, when the arm member reaches the first position, even if the rotation speed of the gear member is constant, the displacement speed of the arm member can be reduced. can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1, the gear member is rotated in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and the protruding pin is moved along the guide groove, whereby the arm member is arranged at the second position. The angle between the straight line connecting the axis of the projecting pin and the arm axis and the line connecting the axis of the projecting pin and the gear axis changes as the arm member approaches the second position from the predetermined position. A gaming machine A2 characterized by being enlarged.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, as the arm member approaches the second position from the predetermined position, the straight line connecting the axial center of the projecting pin and the arm axis and the axial center of the projecting pin and Since the angle formed with the straight line connecting the gear shafts becomes large, the same effect as the game machine A1 is exhibited. That is, when the arm member is held at the second position, the driving force required for the driving means to counteract the external force (for example, gravity) acting on the arm member can be reduced, and the driving means can be reduced accordingly. It is possible to reduce capacity and reduce energy consumption.

Further, when starting to displace the arm member from the second position, the load on the driving means can be reduced, and the capacity can be reduced. , the impact at the time of arrival can be suppressed, and the durability can be improved.

In the game machines A1 and A2, the angle between the straight line connecting the axial center of the projecting pin and the arm axis and the straight line connecting the axial center of the projecting pin and the gear axis is such that the arm member moves from the predetermined position to the first position. The "predetermined position" when it becomes larger as it approaches , means a position where the arm axis, the axial center of the projecting pin, and the gear axis are arranged on one straight line.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the arm member can be displaced to the first position by rotation of the gear member in the first direction, and the guide groove of the arm member allows the arm member to move to the first position. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that a region is formed for moving the projecting pin of the gear member by further rotating the gear member in the first direction when the gear member is arranged in the state of A3.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1 or A2, the guide groove of the arm member is arranged in the first position and the gear member rotates in the first direction. Since the area for the movement of the projecting pin is formed, the gear member is further rotated in the first direction from the state in which the arm member is arranged at the first position, and the projecting pin moves along the guide groove. By moving with the arm member, the gap between the arm shaft and its bearing or the gap between the protruding pin and the guide groove can be absorbed, and the arm member can be pressed toward the first position. As a result, the arm member can be suppressed from rattling at the first position, and as a result, the arm member can be firmly held at the first position.

In the gaming machine A3, after the arm member is arranged at the first position, the gear member connects the axis of the projecting pin and the gear shaft with a straight line connecting the axis of the projecting pin and the arm axis. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that it is rotated to a position perpendicular to a straight line.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3, after the arm member is arranged at the first position, the gear member is configured to move the straight line connecting the axial center of the projecting pin and the arm axis and the position of the projecting pin. Since the arm member is rotated to a position where the straight line connecting the shaft center and the gear shaft is orthogonal, even if an external force acts on the arm member, the force component in the direction to rotate the gear member (i.e., the shaft center of the projecting pin and the gear) A force component in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the axes) is not generated, and the rotation of the gear member can be restricted. As a result, since the arm member can be mechanically maintained at the first position, the driving force of the driving means can be reduced (or released). As a result, the capacity of the driving means can be reduced and the energy consumption can be suppressed.

A game machine A5, wherein the guide groove of the arm member extends linearly in the game machine A3 or A4.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3 or A4, the guide groove of the arm member extends linearly. When further rotated in the direction, the protruding pin of the gear member can be gradually pushed against the inner wall surface of the guide groove of the arm member. That is, the gap between the arm shaft and its bearing or the gap between the projecting pin and the guide groove can be absorbed, and the arm member can be gradually pressed toward the first position.

Any one of the game machines A1 to A5, comprising a case member in which the arm member and the gear shaft are arranged, and rotational position detection means arranged in the case member for detecting the rotational position of the gear member, The gear member includes a gear body which is rotatably disposed on the case member about the gear shaft and has teeth formed on the outer peripheral surface thereof, and projects radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the gear body. and a detected portion that is detected by the rotational position detecting means, and the case member is erected from the case member toward the detected portion and extends along the movement locus of the detected portion. A gaming machine A6 characterized by comprising a regulating rib provided.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, the inclination of the gear member can be effectively suppressed. That is, when the projecting pin of the gear member is moved along the guide groove of the arm member, the gear member is tilted due to the action of reaction force on the projecting pin that presses the inner wall surface of the guide groove. . In this case, according to the gaming machine A6, the case member has a regulating rib erected toward the detected portion of the gear member and extending along the movement locus of the detected portion. When the tilts, the portion to be detected can be received by the restricting ribs. As a result, excessive inclination of the gear member can be avoided while suppressing an increase in rotational resistance of the gear member, and damage to the gear shaft and tooth surface can be suppressed.

In particular, the portion to be detected is a portion that protrudes radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the gear body, and is a portion that undergoes maximum displacement when the gear member is tilted. , the excessive inclination of the gear member can be effectively suppressed. Furthermore, as described above, the portion to be detected, which is the portion detected by the rotational position detecting means, also serves as a stopper function for suppressing the inclination of the gear shaft. The structure can be simplified and the parts cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the parts are separately provided.

A gaming machine A7, wherein a gap is formed between a standing tip of the regulating rib and a bottom face of the detected portion facing the case member in the gaming machine A6.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of the game machine A6, since a gap is formed between the upright tip of the regulating rib and the bottom face of the detected portion facing the case member, the inside of the guide groove When the action of the reaction force on the protruding pin that presses the wall surface is small, the gap between the bottom surface of the detected portion and the upright tip of the regulating rib can be maintained to avoid the occurrence of contact resistance. . As a result, the driving force required to rotate the gear member can be reduced.

A gaming machine A8 in the gaming machine A6 or A7, wherein the detected part is formed by curving an edge of a bottom face facing the case member in an arc shape.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of the game machine A6 or A7, the detected part is formed by curving the edge of the bottom face facing the case member in an arc shape, so that the inclination of the gear member causes the detected part to be detected. Thus, when the bottom surface of the detected portion is brought into contact with the regulating rib, it is possible to prevent the edge of the bottom surface of the detected portion from being caught by the regulating rib. Therefore, the gear member can be rotated smoothly.

A game machine A9 in any one of the game machines A6 to A8, wherein the projecting pin of the gear member is erected from the detected portion.

According to the game machine A9, in any one of the game machines A6 to A8, the gear member has the protruding pin erected from the detected part, so that the gear member rotates and the protruding pin moves into the guide groove of the arm member. When the protruding pin receives a reaction force from the inner wall surface of the guide groove, only the detected portion projecting radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the gear body is partially tilted This makes it easier to suppress the inclination of the gear body (gear shaft). As a result, excessive rotation resistance and wear of the tooth flanks due to rotation in a state in which the tooth flanks of the gear body and the tooth flanks of the mating member meshing with the gear body are deviated from each other can be suppressed.

A game machine A10 in the game machine A9, wherein the restricting rib of the case member is positioned radially outward from the base portion of the projecting pin when viewed in the axial direction of the gear shaft of the gear member.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effects of the game machine A9, the regulating rib of the case member is positioned radially outward from the base of the projecting pin when viewed in the axial direction of the gear shaft of the gear member. When the protruding pin receives a reaction force from the inner wall surface of the guide groove, the overhanging tip side of the detected portion (that is, the portion closest to the case member) can be received by the regulating rib, and the tilt of the gear member is prevented. can be effectively suppressed.

A game machine A11 in any one of the game machines A6 to A10, wherein the regulating rib of the case member extends to a rotational position where the detected portion of the gear member is detected by the rotational position detection means. .

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A6 to A10, the regulating rib of the case member extends to the rotational position where the detected portion of the gear member is detected by the rotational position detection means. Therefore, when the gear member is rotated while the protruding pin receives a reaction force from the inner wall surface of the guide groove, it is possible to prevent the detected portion from colliding with the rotational position detecting means. As a result, it is possible to improve the reliability of detection of the rotational position of the gear member.

A D-shaped cross section formed by making a part of the outer surface of the cylindrical shaft-shaped body flat and having a D-shaped cross section, and a circumferential groove recessed in the outer surface of the D-shaped cross section along the circumferential direction. and an insertion hole formed with a D-shaped cross section by making a part of the inner surface of the circular hole flat so that the D-shaped cross section of the shaft can be inserted, The flat surface of the insertion hole and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section are engaged to prevent the rotating body that rotates together with the shaft and the shaft from slipping out of the insertion hole of the rotating body in the axial direction. and a driving means for imparting a rotational driving force to the shaft or the rotating body, wherein the rotating body extends from its axial end surface toward the shaft. A gaming machine B1 characterized by comprising a protrusion protruding along the line.

According to the gaming machine B1, the D-shaped cross section of the shaft is inserted through the insertion hole of the rotating body, and the retaining ring is fitted in the circumferential groove of the D-shaped end face of the shaft protruding from the axial end face of the rotating body. By being fitted, the shaft is prevented from slipping out in the axial direction from the insertion hole of the rotating body. In this case, the axial end face of the rotating body has a projection along the shaft. A tool such as pliers can be used to lock and work. That is, there is no need to lock the shaft with a tool. Therefore, the retaining ring can be fitted into the circumferential groove of the shaft without damaging the shaft. This is particularly effective when the shaft is made of brass, since it is easily damaged. Examples of damage to the shaft include damage to the surface of the shaft and bending of the axis of the shaft.

In the game machine B1, the game machine B2 is characterized in that the protrusion is positioned between the opposing open ends of a retaining ring fitted in the circumferential groove of the shaft.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, it is possible to prevent the retaining ring from falling out of the circumferential groove of the shaft.

That is, there is a relative rotation position between the shaft and the retaining ring where the engagement between the two is easily released, and when the relative rotation position is reached, the shaft is pulled out of the insertion hole of the rotating body. When a load is applied to the shaft, the retaining ring may fall out of the circumferential groove of the shaft.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B2, since the protrusion is positioned between the opposed opening ends of the retaining ring fitted in the circumferential groove of the shaft, the opening end of the retaining ring is brought into contact with the protrusion. , the retaining ring can be restricted from rotating relative to the shaft. Therefore, by setting the position of the protrusion at an appropriate position, the relative rotational position between the shaft and the retaining ring is maintained at an appropriate position, and the retaining ring is prevented from falling out of the circumferential groove of the shaft. can.

A gaming machine B3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine B2, it comprises engaging means for engaging a retaining ring with the circumferential groove of the shaft.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, it is possible to improve the durability of the shaft and the rotating body.

That is, in a structure in which the rotational torque transmitted between the rotating body and the shaft is borne by the flat surface of the insertion hole of the rotating body and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section of the shaft, these flat surfaces have a large load, It causes deterioration of durability.

On the other hand, since the game machine B3 is provided with engaging means for engaging the retaining ring with the circumferential groove of the shaft, the retaining ring is rotated together with the shaft through the engagement by the engaging means. be able to. As a result, the rotational torque transmitted between the rotating body and the shaft is transferred not only to the flat surface of the insertion hole in the rotating body and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section of the shaft, but also to the protrusions and stops of the rotating body. It can also serve between the open ends of the ring. As a result, the rotational torque can be distributed, and the durability of the shaft and the rotating body can be improved accordingly.

In addition, in order to increase the engagement area between the flat surfaces and improve durability, the shaft and the rotating body must be enlarged and weighted. Since the retaining ring, which serves as a stop, also has a role of bearing the rotational torque, it is possible to reduce the size and weight.

In the game machine B3, the retaining ring has an annular portion formed by cutting a part of the annular shape to form an open end, and radially inward from a plurality of locations on the inner peripheral side of the annular portion in the circumferential direction. The engaging means is formed in the engaged portion formed as a flat surface or a recess on the bottom surface of the circumferential groove of the shaft body. A gaming machine B4 characterized by engaging at least one projecting portion of a retaining ring.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3, the retaining ring is formed as an E-shaped retaining ring having a plurality of overhanging portions formed on the inner peripheral side of the annular portion, and the engaging means is At least one protruding portion of the retaining ring is engaged with the engaged portion formed as a flat surface or a recess in the bottom surface of the circumferential groove of the shaft. can be firmly engaged. That is, since the rotational torque can be reliably received by the engagement between the projecting portion and the engaged portion, the durability of the shaft and the rotating body can be improved, and the transmittable rotational torque can be increased. can. In addition, since a general-purpose part (E-type retaining ring) can be used as the retaining ring, the cost of parts can be reduced.

In addition, since the engaged portion is formed as a flat surface or a concave portion on the bottom surface of the circumferential groove, the engagement between the circumferential groove and the retaining ring of the shaft can be achieved, and the size and weight of the shaft can be reduced. can be improved.

In the gaming machine B4, the engaged portion formed on the bottom surface of the circumferential groove of the shaft body is in a state in which the flat surface of the insertion hole and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section are engaged with the projection. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being positioned with a phase difference of 180 degrees.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4, the engaged portion formed on the bottom surface of the circumferential groove of the shaft engages the flat surface of the insertion hole and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section. In this state, the projecting portion is positioned 180 degrees out of phase with the projecting portion, so that the work of engaging the projecting portion of the retaining ring and the engaged portion of the shaft can be performed easily and reliably. That is, when the D-shaped cross section of the shaft is inserted into the insertion hole of the rotating body, and the D-shaped end face of the shaft protrudes from the axial end face of the rotating body, the opposite side of the protrusion (180 degrees out of phase) Since the engaged portion is located on the opposite side), the engaging direction of the retaining ring for positioning the protrusion between the open ends of the retaining ring and the projecting portion of the retaining ring are aligned with the engaged portion of the shaft. It is possible to match the fitting direction of the snap ring for engaging with the part. Therefore, by simply fitting the retaining ring into the circumferential groove of the shaft while engaging the protrusion and the retaining ring with a tool such as pliers, the projecting portion of the retaining ring can be engaged with the shaft. The joint can be easily and reliably engaged.

A gaming machine B6 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the protrusion is formed at a position that is in phase with a flat surface in the insertion hole of the rotating body.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B5, the protrusion is formed at a position that is in the same phase as the flat surface in the insertion hole of the rotating body, so durability is improved. can be planned. That is, the portion of the rotating body where the flat surface is formed in the insertion hole is the thickest (thickest in the radial direction) and is a portion where the strength is ensured. Therefore, by forming the projection at a portion of the insertion hole that is in the same phase as the flat surface, the load acting from the projection can be received at the portion where the strength is ensured, and the rotating body Durability can be improved. In addition, if the position of the insertion hole is in the same phase as the flat surface, the cross-sectional area of the protrusion can be increased, so that the strength can be secured and the durability of the protrusion itself can be improved. can be planned.

In the game machine B6, the projection has a flat surface located on the side facing the shaft and formed continuously with the flat surface of the insertion hole, and the flat surface of the insertion hole and the flat surface of the projection , a game machine B7 characterized in that it can be engaged with a flat surface of a D-shaped cross section of the shaft.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B6, the protrusion has a flat surface located on the side facing the shaft body and formed continuously with the flat surface of the insertion hole. And since the flat surface of the protrusion can be engaged with the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section of the shaft, the engagement area between the flat surfaces can be increased by the amount of the flat surface formed on the protrusion. . As a result, the rotational torque can be distributed, and the durability of the shaft and the rotating body can be improved accordingly.

In addition, the flat surface of the D-shaped section of the shaft is engaged with the protrusion that abuts the open end of the retaining ring and serves to suppress the relative rotation of the retaining ring with respect to the shaft. In addition, by making it also play the role of bearing the rotational torque, it is possible to improve the durability of the shaft and the rotating body, and to reduce the size and weight.

According to any one of game machines B3 to B7, an arm member that is displaced around an arm shaft, and a decorative member that is rotatably disposed on the arm member and functions as a decorative body, the shaft body, A game machine B8 characterized in that a rotating body, a snap ring and a driving means are arranged on the arm member for rotating the decorative member.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B3 to B7, the durability of the mechanism for rotating the decorative member is improved while suppressing the displacement of the arm member from being hindered. be able to. That is, since the decorative member is large and heavy in order to function as a decorative body, the mechanism for rotating the decorative member is required to be durable enough to withstand a large rotational torque. is displaced around , it is required to suppress the inertial force by reducing the weight. In this case, by adopting the above-described shaft body, rotating body, retaining ring, and driving means as a mechanism for rotating the decorative member, it is possible to reduce the size and weight while ensuring the durability to receive a large rotational torque. Displacement of the arm member can be performed smoothly.

A game machine comprising a case member, an arm member displaceably disposed on the case member, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the arm member to displace the arm member with respect to the case member, a second rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member; and a connecting member having one end pivotally supported by the second rotating member and having the other end displaceably connected to the case member. A gaming machine C1 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C1, the arm member is displaced with respect to the case member by applying the driving force from the driving means. In this case, one end of the connecting member is pivotally supported by the second rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member, and the other end of the connecting member is connected to the case member so as to be displaceable. When the arm member and the connecting member are displaced with respect to the case member, the angle between the arm member and the connecting member (a straight line connecting the connecting position where one end of the connecting member angle formed by a straight line connecting a connecting position where one end of the connecting member is connected to a connecting position where the other end of the connecting member is connected to the case member), the second rotating member is moved relative to the arm member. It can be displaced (rotated). That is, since the driving means for applying the driving force to the arm member can also serve as the means for rotating the second rotating member, the driving means for rotating the second rotating member can be eliminated.

In the gaming machine C1, a first rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member, and driving means for applying a driving force to the first rotating member to rotate the first rotating member with respect to the arm member. A gaming machine C2 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, a driving force is applied to the first rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member to rotate the first rotating member with respect to the arm member. Since the drive means is provided, the arm member is displaced by the drive force applied from the drive means, and the second rotating member is rotated in accordance with the displacement of the arm member. can rotate the first rotating member. In other words, it is not necessary to provide driving means (three in total) for each of the arm member, the second rotating member and the first rotating member, and the arm member, the second rotating member and the first rotating member can be driven by two driving means. can do.

A gaming machine C3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine C2, the second rotating member and the first rotating member are arranged coaxially.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, since the second rotating member and the first rotating member are coaxially arranged, both the second rotating member and the first rotating member are arm members. It is possible to enhance the presentation effect in the case of being rotated simultaneously with the displacement of .

A gaming machine C4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine C3, the second rotating member is arranged on the back side of the first rotating member.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3, the second rotating member is disposed on the back side of the first rotating member (that is, the game board side), so that during the displacement of the arm member, It is possible to prevent the trajectory of the connecting member from overlapping the first rotating member and hiding part of the first rotating member behind the connecting member. That is, the entire first rotary member can be exposed during displacement of the arm member.

A gaming machine C5, wherein in any one of the gaming machines C2 to C4, the second rotating member and the first rotating member rotate in the same direction.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C2 to C4, since the second rotating member and the first rotating member rotate in the same direction, the arm member is displaced to cause the second rotation. When the member and the first rotating member are rotated at the same time, it is possible to give the player the impression that both rotate smoothly, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

A gaming machine C6 characterized in that, in the gaming machine C5, the second rotating member and the first rotating member are arranged coaxially and have different rotation speeds.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C5, the second rotating member and the first rotating member are arranged coaxially and have different rotation speeds, so that the two members (the second rotating member and the first rotating member) can be rotated in the same rotational direction at different rotational speeds while being displaced on the same trajectory along the displacement direction of the arm member. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of giving the player the impression that the two members (the second rotating member and the first rotating member) rotate smoothly.

In any one of game machines C1 to C6, the case member has a guide groove extending in a groove shape, and the other end of the connecting member is slidably connected to the case member via the guide groove. A gaming machine C7 characterized by:

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C6, the connection member is slidably connected to the case member through the guide groove of the case member. The displaceable amount of the arm member can be increased compared to a form in which the other end of the arm member is pivotally supported by the case member. In this case, if the displaceable amount of the arm member is increased, the rotatable amount of the second rotating member can also be increased. Therefore, when the arm member is displaced, it is possible to enhance not only the presentation effect by the displacement of the arm member itself, but also the presentation effect by the rotation of the second rotating member accompanying the displacement.

In any one of game machines C1 to C7, a liquid crystal display device is provided, and the arm member is positioned between a first position above the display area of the liquid crystal display device and a second position outside the display region of the liquid crystal display device. The case member has an edge portion formed along the outer edge of the display area of the liquid crystal display device and positioned on the displacement trajectory of the arm member, the edge portion forming a circular cross-section. A gaming machine C8 characterized by being curved in an arc.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C7, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the arm member from being hindered by the edge of the case member while ensuring the display area of the liquid crystal device.

That is, in the configuration in which the arm member is displaced between the first position and the second position about the arm axis, the overall length of the arm member is increased, so that the arm member is moved forward and backward (in a direction perpendicular to the game board) when the arm member is displaced. vibration is likely to occur. Therefore, when the arm member is displaced from the first position to the second position, the arm member may collide with the edge of the case member, causing damage, or the arm member may be locked by the edge of the case member and cannot be displaced. may disappear. On the other hand, it is conceivable to prevent the edge of the case member from being positioned on the displacement trajectory of the arm member. Since it is hidden by the member, it cannot be done. Retracting the edge of the case member out of the displacement trajectory of the arm member exposes the wiring and the substrate arranged on the back side and spoils the appearance. I can't.

In this case, according to the gaming machine C8, the edge formed along the outer edge of the display area of the liquid crystal display device and positioned on the displacement trajectory of the arm member is curved in an arcuate cross-section. Assume that the arm member swayed backward collides with the edge of the case member when the arm member is displaced from the first position to the second position while securing an opening for exposing the display area of the liquid crystal device in the case member. Also, the arm member can be guided by the curvature of the arcuate cross section to absorb the impact. Therefore, damage can be suppressed, and the arm member can be smoothly displaced by suppressing the arm member from being locked and stopped by the edge of the case member.

A game machine C9, wherein in the game machine C8, the case member has a decorative shape formed adjacent to the edge.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effects of the game machine C8, the case member is formed with a decorative shape adjacent to the edge of the case member, so that the edge is curved in an arcuate cross section. Even in such a case, it is possible to allow the player to recognize the edge part and the decorative shape as an integrated design without any sense of incongruity, and to prevent the edge part from being unnaturally conspicuous.

The term "decorative shape" means a shape formed on the front or back surface of the case member. A combination etc. are illustrated. The grooves or striations may be straight or curved, or a combination thereof. The same applies to the gaming machine C11.

In the game machine C9, the arm member displaces the front side of the case member, and the case member is made of a light-transmitting material, has a flat front surface, and has a decorative shape. A game machine C10 characterized in that it is formed on the back surface.

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effects of the game machine C9, since the front surface of the case member in which the arm member is displaced is formed as a flat surface, the movement of the arm member is suppressed from being hindered and is smoothly displaced. can be made On the other hand, since the case member is made of a light-transmitting material and the ornamental shape is formed on the back surface, it is possible to ensure the effect that the player recognizes the edge portion and the ornamental shape as an integrated design without any sense of incongruity. Further, when the front surface of the case member is formed as a flat surface, scratches are likely to be formed due to the sliding of the arm members. can be done.

A game machine comprising a case member, an arm member displaceably disposed on the case member, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the arm member to displace the arm member with respect to the case member, The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the case member includes a first case portion in which the arm member is arranged, and a second case portion detachably connected to the first case portion.

According to the gaming machine D1, the case member includes the first case portion in which the arm member is arranged, and the second case portion detachably connected to the first case portion, so that it can be applied to other models. It is possible to efficiently use the case member.

That is, for example, when changing the arrangement position of the arm member in accordance with the change of the displacement mode of the arm member, it is useless to change the entire case member when there is no need to change other parts. Similarly, when changing other parts, it is useless to change the entire case member when there is no need to change the arrangement position of the arm member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the case member is divided into the first case portion in which the arm member is arranged and the second case portion detachably connected to the first case portion. Only one of the first case part and the second case part needs to be changed according to the contents of the change, and the other of the first case part and the second case part can be used. can be efficiently diverted.

In the game machine D1, the game machine D2 is characterized in that the case member has a decorative shape formed on the second case portion.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the case member has a decorative shape formed in the second case portion, so that the case member can be efficiently diverted to other models. .

That is, it is useless to change the entire case member when changing the arrangement position of the arm member in accordance with the change of the displacement mode of the arm member, although it is not necessary to change the decorative shape. Similarly, when changing the decorative shape, it is useless to change the entire case member when there is no need to change the arrangement position of the arm member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, the case member is divided into the first case portion in which the arm member is arranged and the second case portion in which the decorative shape is formed. Only one of the first case part and the second case part needs to be changed, and the other of the first case part and the second case part can be diverted, so that the case member can be efficiently used for other models. It can be carried out.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the case member includes a metal back plate member attached to the back sides of the first case portion and the second case portion, A gaming machine D3, characterized in that one side of the game machine D3 is provided with a protruding plate portion that protrudes outward and is sandwiched between the other of the first case portion or the second case portion and the back plate member.

According to the game machine D3, in the game machine D1 or D2, the case members are connected by the metal back plate member to which the first case portion and the second case portion are attached on the back side thereof. The connection between the first case portion and the second case portion is made strong, and the rigidity of the case member as a whole can be ensured. Further, one of the first case portion and the second case portion has a projecting plate portion projecting outward, and the projecting plate portion is connected to the other of the first case portion or the second case portion and the back plate member. Therefore, by utilizing the overlap of the plate-like bodies, it is possible to effectively increase the rigidity of the case as a whole while achieving simplification and miniaturization of the structure.

In the game machine D3, the game machine D4 is characterized in that a positioning wall positioned along the outline of the projecting plate is formed on the other back surface of the first case or the second case.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, the other rear surface of the first case portion or the second case portion is formed with a positioning wall positioned along the outer shape of the projecting plate portion. When the protruding plate portion that protrudes from one of the first case portion and the second case portion is arranged on the rear surface of the other of the first case portion and the second case portion before attaching the rear plate member, the protruding plate The part can be positioned by a positioning wall. Therefore, it is possible to improve workability when assembling the case member.

In addition, the positioning wall need not be formed continuously along the outer shape of the protruding plate portion, and may be formed intermittently. That is, it is not necessary to provide the positioning walls over the entire outer shape of the protruding plate portion, and it is sufficient that the positioning walls are partially interspersed with the outer shape of the protruding plate portion.

In the game machine D4, the protruding height of the positioning wall is equal to the thickness dimension of the projecting plate portion, and the protruding end surface of the positioning wall serves as a seat surface for receiving the back plate member. A game machine D5.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects of the game machine D4, the protruding end surface of the positioning wall serves as a seat surface for receiving the back plate member. The contact area between the case part and the other part can be increased, and the connection between the two can be strengthened. Thereby, the rigidity of the case portion as a whole can be increased.

In game machines D1 to D5, a second rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member, and one end of which is pivotally supported by the second rotating member and the other end of which is displaceably connected to the second case portion A gaming machine D6 characterized by comprising: a connecting member that

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D1 to D5, one end of the connecting member is pivotally supported by the second rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member, and the other end of the connecting member is displaceably connected to the second case member, when the arm member is displaced with respect to the case member, the angle formed by the arm member and the connecting member (when one end of the connecting member is connected to the second rotating member and a straight line connecting the connecting position where one end of the connecting member is connected to the second rotating member and the connecting position where the other end of the connecting member is connected to the second case member. The second rotating member can be relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to the arm member in accordance with the change in the angle formed. That is, the driving means for applying the driving force to the arm member can also serve as the means for rotating the second rotating member. Only one driving means for displacing can achieve the two actions of displacing the arm member and rotating the second rotating member.

In this case, since the other end of the connecting member is displaceably arranged in the second case portion, the distance between the arm shaft of the arm member and the other end of the connecting member can be increased. As a result, the amount of displacement of the arm member can be increased, and the presentation effect by displacing the arm member can be enhanced.

As for the relationship between the connecting member and the case member, it is sufficient that the other end of the connecting member is connected to the case member so as to be displaceable. Even in the case where the second case part is used as it is, it is relatively easy to deal with it. Therefore, by adopting the configuration in which the other end of the connecting member is connected to the second case portion instead of the first case portion, the case member can be efficiently used for other models and the arm member can be displaced. It is possible to achieve both volume expansion.

A gaming machine E1, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A11, gaming machines B1 to B8, gaming machines C1 to C10, or gaming machines D1 to D6. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine E2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A11, gaming machines B1 to B8, gaming machines C1 to C10, or gaming machines D1 to D6. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of game machines A1 to A11, game machines B1 to B8, game machines C1 to C10, or game machines D1 to D6, the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Gaming machine E3. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
A game machine such as a pachinko machine, comprising a gear member having teeth formed on the outer circumference and an insertion hole formed in the center thereof, and a shaft body inserted through the insertion hole of the gear member, the insertion hole being formed of the gear member. A structure is known in which rotational torque can be transmitted between a gear member and a shaft by utilizing engagement between flat surfaces provided on the inner surface and the outer surface of the shaft. (For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2012-115580).
A circumferential groove is recessed in the tip of the shaft, and after the shaft is inserted into the insertion hole of the gear member, the retaining ring is fitted into the circumferential groove of the shaft, whereby the shaft is It is made not to slip out of the insertion hole. In this case, the operation of fitting the retaining ring into the circumferential groove involves locking the shaft body and the retaining ring with one arm and the other arm of a tool such as radio pliers, respectively, and bringing these one arm and the other arm close to each other. It is done by displacing in the direction. However, there is a problem that the shaft may be damaged by being caught by the arm of the tool during the fitting operation.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing damage to the shaft.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the game machine of Technical Concept 1 includes a D-shaped cross-sectional portion formed in a D-shaped cross section by making a part of the outer surface of the cylindrical shaft-shaped body flat, and a D-shaped cross-section thereof. A part of the inner surface of the circular hole is made flat so that the shaft having a circumferential groove recessed along the circumferential direction in the outer surface of the part and the D-shaped cross section of the shaft can be inserted. a rotating body having an insertion hole formed in a D-shaped cross section, and rotating together with the shaft by engaging the flat surface of the insertion hole and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section, and the rotating body and a retaining ring fitted in the circumferential groove to prevent the shaft from slipping out of the insertion hole in the axial direction, and a drive means for applying rotational driving force to the shaft or the rotating body There is, and the rotating body is provided with a projecting portion projecting along the shaft from its axial end surface.
The gaming machine according to Technical Idea 2 is the gaming machine according to Technical Idea 1, wherein the projecting portion is positioned between the opposing open ends of the snap ring fitted in the circumferential groove of the shaft.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, further comprising engaging means for engaging a retaining ring with the circumferential groove of the shaft.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the D-shaped cross section of the shaft is inserted into the insertion hole of the rotating body, and the circumference of the D-shaped end face of the shaft protruding from the axial end face of the rotating body By fitting the snap ring into the groove, the shaft is prevented from slipping out in the axial direction from the insertion hole of the rotating body. In this case, the axial end face of the rotating body has a projection along the shaft. A tool such as pliers can be used to lock and work. That is, there is no need to lock the shaft with a tool. Therefore, the retaining ring can be fitted into the circumferential groove of the shaft without damaging the shaft. This is particularly effective when the shaft is made of brass, since it is easily damaged. Examples of damage to the shaft include damage to the surface of the shaft and bending of the axis of the shaft.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, it is possible to prevent the snap ring from falling out of the circumferential groove of the shaft. That is, there is a relative rotation position between the shaft and the retaining ring where the engagement between the two is easily released, and when the relative rotation position is reached, the shaft is pulled out of the insertion hole of the rotating body. When a load is applied to the shaft, the retaining ring may fall out of the circumferential groove of the shaft.
On the other hand, according to technical idea 2, since the protrusion is positioned between the opposing open ends of the retaining ring fitted in the circumferential groove of the shaft, the open end of the retaining ring is brought into contact with the protrusion. By doing so, it is possible to restrict the rotation of the retaining ring relative to the shaft. Therefore, by setting the position of the protrusion at an appropriate position, the relative rotational position between the shaft and the retaining ring is maintained at an appropriate position, and the retaining ring is prevented from falling out of the circumferential groove of the shaft. can.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, it is possible to improve the durability of the shaft and the rotating body. That is, in a structure in which the rotational torque transmitted between the rotating body and the shaft is borne by the flat surface of the insertion hole of the rotating body and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section of the shaft, these flat surfaces have a large load, It causes deterioration of durability.
On the other hand, in Technical Concept 3, since an engaging means for engaging the retaining ring with the circumferential groove of the shaft is provided, the retaining ring is rotated together with the shaft through the engagement by the engaging means. can be made As a result, the rotational torque transmitted between the rotating body and the shaft is transferred not only to the flat surface of the insertion hole in the rotating body and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section of the shaft, but also to the protrusions and stops of the rotating body. It can also serve between the open ends of the ring. As a result, the rotational torque can be distributed, and the durability of the shaft and the rotating body can be improved accordingly.
Further, in order to increase the engagement area between the flat surfaces and improve the durability, the size and weight of the shaft and the rotating body are increased. Since the retaining ring, which serves as a retainer, also serves as a bearing of rotational torque, it is possible to reduce the size and weight.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 third pattern display device (liquid crystal display device)
400 case member 410 first base body (part of case member, first case portion)
413 Regulating rib 415 Seat wall (positioning wall)
430 second base body (second case part)
431 guide groove 433 edge portion 434 projecting plate portion 450 rear plate member 500 first arm (arm member)
511a guide groove 520 arm shaft 531 drive motor (driving means)
533 wheel gear (rotating body)
533a flat surface (flat surface of insertion hole)
533b insertion hole 533e projection 533e1 flat surface (flat surface of projection)
534, 2534, 3534 Retaining ring 534a Opening end 534b Annular portion 534c Overhanging portions 2534c, 3534c Overhanging portion 540 First rotary decorative body (decorative member, first rotary member)
542 shaft 542a flat surface (flat surface of D-shaped cross section)
542b D-shaped cross section 542c Circumferential grooves 2542d, 3542d Engaged portion 550 Second rotary decoration (second rotary member)
600 second arm (connecting member)
700 Gear member 710 Gear body 720 Detected portion 730 Projecting pin 790 Gear shaft 900 Drive motor (driving means)
L1 Straight line L2 connecting projecting pin and arm shaft Straight line θ connecting projecting pin and gear shaft Angle S formed by straight lines L1 and L2 Rotational position detection sensor (rotational position detection means)

Claims (3)

A D-shaped cross section formed by making a part of the outer surface of the cylindrical shaft-shaped body flat and having a D-shaped cross section, and a circumferential groove recessed in the outer surface of the D-shaped cross section along the circumferential direction. and an insertion hole formed with a D-shaped cross section by making a part of the inner surface of the circular hole flat so that the D-shaped cross section of the shaft can be inserted, The flat surface of the insertion hole and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section are engaged to prevent the rotating body that rotates together with the shaft and the shaft from slipping out of the insertion hole of the rotating body in the axial direction. A game machine comprising: a retaining ring fitted in the circumferential groove for
A gaming machine, wherein the rotating body has a protrusion projecting along the shaft from its axial end surface. 2. A game machine according to claim 1, wherein said protrusion is positioned between the opposing open ends of a retaining ring fitted in said circumferential groove of said shaft. 3. A game machine according to claim 2, further comprising engaging means for engaging a retaining ring with the circumferential groove of said shaft.

Images